以下是小编给大家收集的19篇人教新课标高中必修四 unit 2 金色教案(新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)，欢迎大家前来参阅。
Unit 2 Working the land
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
1． A sample lesson plan for reading
(Working the land)
Aims
To help students develop their reading ability.
To help students learn about working the land.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by questioning
Hello, everyone. We shall read about man who works the land today. Have you ever grown any plants? If not, what kind of plant would you like to grow? How will you grow it?
(For reference: Mr. Li, I worked with my father in the rice field last year. We grow hybrid rice and use animal wastes to make the soil rich.)
Has anyone of you ever been to the countryside? What did you do there?
(For reference: I went to Chuankou the day before yesterday. It is a small mountain village 75 li north of Beijing. I went there to visit my uncle’s family. I like that small beautiful village very much. )
Who are from a farmer’s family? What do you know about farming?
(For reference: Mr. Li, Dou Jun and I are from a farmer’s family in our class. We grow wheat and raise pigs on our farms. And both of our family are going to expand the area of fields this year. )
Warming up seeing and listening
Boys and girls, I shall show you some photos of farming first. Look at this one. What are these ppeople doing in the fields? Yes, it is spring and they are planting rice. Lots of people in the world live on rice. I think you like eating rice, too.
Planting rice
Here is another photo about farming. The man driving the tractor in the photo is plowing the land to prepare for the planting. He does not grow rice there. What kind of crop is he going to plant here?
Plowing the land
This photo is interesting. The woman farmer from Tibet is harvesting her crops not in the open field but in a plastic house. For generations, the people in Tibet Autonomous Region, have farmed the land using traditional methods. But in recent years, things have begun to change. All the farmers admitt the new ways are better.
Indoor harvesting
II. Pre-reading
1. Questioning and answering
Rice is main food in South China. What do you think would happen if tomorrow there was suddenly no rice to eat?
(For reference: Then the south people would have to change their eating habit. They could turn to potatoes, wheat flour, cow and sheep cheese, cabbage, onions and garlic for food. They are the bases of the traditional food in North China. )
If you had the chance to do one thing to help end hunger in the world, what would you do?
(For reference: I would try to end hunger by popularizing the advanced farming techniques. Modern techniques could be introduced to increase the rice output, and expand the area of fields.)
2. Giving background information about Professor Yuan Longping
Have you ever heard of a man called Professor Yuan Longping? Would anyone of you tell the class something about him?
(For reference: Professor Yuan Longping is a Chinese agricultural scientist. Professor Yuan's breakthrough scientific achievement led to the world's first successful and widely grown hybrid rice varieties, revolutionizing rice cultivation in China and tripling production over a generation. His approach to rice breeding then spread internationally throughout Asia and to Africa and the Americas, providing food for tens of millions and leading to his becoming known as the “Father of Hybrid Rice.”
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording
Comprehension-understanding what you are reading-is important. To read in thought groups is an easy, yet effective, way of improving reading comprehension. Now turn to page 9 and read aloud to the recording of the text A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE. Pay attention to the thought groups in the sentences while listening and reading aloud.
2. Reading and underlining
Read the text again and underline all the collocations in the passage. You are asked to copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from A PIONEER FRO ALL PEOPLE
call sb. …, regard sb. …, work the land, do one’s research, for the past five decades, grow hybrid rice, become an agricultural pioneer, have a high output, produce one-third more of the crop, be born into a poor family, graduate from a college, devote one’s life to…, find ways to do sth., see the great need for doing sth., increase the rice output, search for a way to do sth., increase rice harvests, expand the area of fields, produce tons of rice, feed sb. from a piece of farmland, circulate one’s knowledge, thanks to…, rid the world of hunger, be satisfied with…, care little about…, spend money on…, lead a comfortable life, have troubles, equip sb. for sth., care about…, keep one’s time for…, play one’s violin, play mah-jong, ride one’s motorcycle, wish for…, in a dream, an ear of rice, a grain of rice, awake from one’s dream
3. Reading, identifying and summarizing
Attention, please! It is time to skim the text one more time and identify the topic sentence of each paragraph.
(Minutes later) Xue Hongmei, would you read to the class the four topic sentences you identified?
What about the main idea of the passage? Who will volunteer to give the class his summary of the main idea? Bai Jianfang, you’d like to say something? Go ahead!
4. Understanding difficult sentences
In groups of four, analyze the structure of the difficult sentences. If you have any problems which are too difficult for you to solve do not hesitate to put them to me.
5. Reading and transferring
In pairs, read the text, find information to complete the following form.
Facts about Yuan Longping Facts about Yuan’s super hybrid rice
age capacity
education application
major contribution
hobby overseas
ideal future
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
In the last five minutes let’s do the comprehension exercises on page 10. Check your answers against your neighbour’s when you have finished.
Closing down by having a dictation
To end the period you will take a dictation. It is about Yuan Longping, “Father of Super hybrid rice”.
Yuan Longping, China's Most Famous “Farmer”
Yuan came up with the idea of hybridizing rice for the first time in the world in 1960s.
Since then, 50 percent of China's total rice cultivation fields have grown such rice,
which added some 300 billion kilograms to the country's grain output. Furrows grown on his sunburnt face, a slim figure and coiled-up trousers legs would confuse foreign reporters who came to interview the most famous
scientist in China, who would rather be called “a farmer.”Indeed, like many Chinese
farmers, Yuan in his 70s and has devoted most of his life growing rice in paddyfields,
but unlike those farmers, he reaps the seed from experimental fields only
for hybridizing rice.
2．A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The –ing form as the Subject & Object)
Aims
To help students learn about The –ing form as the Subject & Object.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful structures.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up reading aloud the text A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
Language is learned in context. So let’s first review the text learned yesterday by reading it aloud. Try to force out your English slowly and clearly.
II. Discovering useful words and expressions
In pairs do the exercises 1, 2 and 3 on pages 11 and 12. You must finish them in 5 minutes.
III. Learning about grammar
1. Read and identify
Read the text about Yuan Longping again, paying attention to the sentences which use the –ing form as the subject and object.
In the sentence “Wishing for things, however, cost nothing. “the –ing is used as subject.
It can be also used as object of the sentence. For example: Yuan Longping likes playing his violin.
2. Consolidating by do exercises
To consolidate your understanding you will be given 10 minutes to go over exercises 1,2,3,4 and 5 on pages 12 and 13. You may just write on your text book. I mean the student’s book you are working by.
III. Ready used materials for The –ing form as the Subject & Object)
语法学习--动名词
1. 动名词作主语
1） 名词直接放在句首作主语。例如：
Using the right hand to shake hands is a convention in many countries.
用右手握手是许多国家的一种习俗。
2） 动名词在“It is no use/ no good/ fun / a waste of time/ a good pleasure 等名词 + doing”结构中作主语，it为形式主语。例如：
It is no good writing to him; he never answers letters.
写信给他不妥，他从来不回信。
It is no use your complaining; the company won’t do anything about it.
抱怨是没有用的，公司是不会管的。
3） 动名词在“It is useless/ nice/ good/ interesting/ worthwhile 等形容词 + doing”结构中作主语。例如：
It is good playing chess after supper.
晚饭后弈棋挺好。
It is useless speaking.
光说是没有用的。
4） 动名词在“There is(was) no + doing”结构中作主语。例如：
There is no denying that she is very efficient.
她效率高是不容否认的。
There is no telling what he is going to do.
他要做什么一点消息都没有。
2. 动名词作宾语
1） 有些动词后面要求跟动名词作宾语。常这样用的动词有：
admit 承认 ； excuse 原谅 ； postpone 拖延 ；anticipate 期望； fancy 想象
practise 练习； appreciate 欣赏； finish 完成； prevent 防止； avoid 避免；
forbid 禁止； propose 建议； consider 考虑； forgive 宽恕； recollect 回忆；
delay 耽搁； imagine 想象； resent 厌恶； deny 否认； involve 涉及；
resist 抵制； detest 厌恶； keep 保留； risk 冒险； dislike 讨厌； mind 在意； save 挽救； dread 害怕； miss 错过； suggest 建议； enjoy 喜欢； pardon 原谅；
understand 理解； escape 逃避；permit 允许
例如：
I recommend buying the dictionary.
我建议买这本词典。
I don’t anticipate meeting any opposition.
我估计不会遇到任何反对意见。
Will you admit having broken the window?
你承认不承认打破了窗户？
2） 有些动词短语后也要求跟动名词作宾语。常这样用的动词短语有：
can’t stand 忍不住； can’t help 忍不住； feel like 想，欲；
give up 放弃； put off 推迟
例如：
He put off making a decision till he had more information.
在获得详情之前，他没有急于作出决定。
Do you feel like taking a walk?
你要不要去散步？
3） 动名词常跟在介词或介词短语后做宾语。常这样用的介词短语有：instead of, look forward to, object to, keep on, see about, take to 等。
例如：
We are looking forward to coming to China.
我们期待着来中国。
We succeeded in getting over all the difficulties.
我们终于克服了所有的困难。
4） 在“have difficulty (trouble, problem, a hard time, fun, a good time) (+in) + 动名词； be busy (in) + 动名词；waste time (in) + 动名词；lost time (in) + 动名词；There is no point (in) + 动名词”等结构中，动名词做介词宾语，in常要省去。例如：
The children are busy doing their homework.
孩子们忙于做作业。
There is no point (in) making the simple experiments once again.
再做一次这种简单的实验是毫无意义的。
5） 在复合宾语中，用it作形式宾语，将动名词短语放在后面。例如：
I consider it a waste of time arguing about it.
我认为辩论这事是很浪费时间的。
6） 在“there be”结构当中，be为动名词时，该结构也是一种带逻辑主语的动名词形式。例如：
We can imagine there being a lot of fuss about it.
我们可以想象到人们对此大惊小怪。
Were you disappointed at there not having been more gifts?
你对没有更多的礼物感到失望吗？
3. 动名词的被动式
1） 动词need, require, want, deserve后，用动名词的主动形式表示被动意义。其用法相当于不定式的被动结构。例如：
The watch needs repairing. (=The watch needs to be repaired.)
这块表需要修理。
The problem deserves thinking about. (=The problem deservers to be thought about.)
这个问题值得考虑。
2） 在（be）worth后面只能用动名词的主动态来表示被动意义。例如：
His suggestion is worth considering.
他的提议值得考虑。
IV. Closing down by doing a quiz
巩固练习: 动名词要点单项选择测验
1. While shopping, people sometimes can't help ________ into buying something they don't really need.
A. to persuade B. persuading C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
2. -How do you deal with the disagreement between the company and the customers?
-The key ________ the problem is to meet the demand ________ by the customers.
A. to solving; making
B. to solving; made
C. to solve; making
D. to solve; made
3. How about the two of us ________ a walk down the garden?
A. to take B. take C. taking D. to be taking
4. -What do you think made Mary so upset?
- ________ her new bicycle.
A. As she lost B. Lost C. Losing D. Because of losing
5. -We don't allow anyone ________ here.
-Well, I hate to say it again. We don't allow ________ here.
A. to smoke; smoking
B. smoking; to smoke
C. to smoke; to smoke
D. smoking; smoking
6. They thought there is no trouble ________ their favorite brand from other brands.
A. to tell B. telling
C. tell D. told
7. Some birds finally reach home by accidentally ________ landmarks which they recognize.
A. to come across B. coming around C. coming across D. to come around
8. Millions of pounds have been spent ________ the free state education system in Britain.
A. to improving B. in improving C. to improve D. to have improved
9. A large glass of water before you eat may help ________ too excited before delicious foods.
A. to keep you from getting
B. to carry you from getting
C. to prevent you to get
D. to stop you to get
10. ________ for school once in a while often makes Mr. Smith angry.
A. Tom being late B. Tom to be late C. For Tom being late D. Tom's being late
Key: 1-5 CBCCA 6-10 BCBAD
3． A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(Organic Farming)
Aims
To help students read the passage Organic Farming.
To help students to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by listening and reading aloud
Language is created to be listened to and spoken first. So open your book to page 13 and read it aloud while listening to the recording. Watch your pauses between the thought groups.
II. Guided reading
1. Reading and translating
Read the text sentence by sentence, and put it into Chinese. Who will be the first to try. I will only have four of you to do this task. OK, Wang Shan. You got it, the opportunity, I mean.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from ORGANIC FARMING
gain a meaning, refer to…, make the soil fertile, natural waste from animals, put…in the field, make the soil rich, become healthy, develop a healthy soil, reduce diseases, grow strong and healthy, keep…free from…, leave…in the ground, as a result, get exhausted, kill bacteria and pests, insist on…, change crops, be followed by…, put…back into …, need a deeper level of soil, prefer doing sth, plant…between crops, prevent…from…, carry away…, make sure that
3. Doing exercises
Now you are going to do exercises No. 1, 2 and 3 on page 14 following the article.
4. Listening
For listening turn to page 14 and then 15 for the listening exercises 1, 2 and 3. Are you ready?
5. Reading, speaking and writing
When trying to argue people into or out of doing something we may use the following expressions:
I would rather… I don’t like…because…
I’d prefer…because It’s a great pity that…
Should I / we…? It’s better to…
This is good value because… If I have a choice I’d choose…because
What is the advantage of…? You need to…
In pairs you are to make up a dialogue to argue each other into or out adopting organic farming. I will argue with your monitor, Liang Bochao. Get started.
III. Guided writing
1. Writing a poster
Writing a poster which includes all the information about the uses of computer so that you will encourage more farmers to buy and use. You are asked to base your poster on the overall pattern of the article you learned Organic Farming. Limit your poster to between 200 and 250 words.
2. Writing a speech
Write a speech for Professor Yuan Longping. He is to attend an international conference on modern agriculture. You may also make use of the library and network resources for the task.
IV. Further applying
Finding information
Read online to find as much information as possible about Professor Yuan Longping and his research group. Share your findings with you partner next time you are here.
Writing a report
Go back home to interview your parents or your grandparents about China’s agriculture, its past and present situations. Write a report in English in about 500 words as a weekly project.
Acting a text play
Turn either one of the two articles into a text play. Rehearse it and play it in front of the class. The play shall last at least 10 minutes.
IV. Closing down
Closing down by filling a form
To end the period please fill in the form below.
What is organic farming?
definition
characteristics
potentials
Closing down by imaging
Imagine and write about what the agriculture will be like 50 years from now in the future. Use your imagination to compete for “wild thinking prize”.
Part Two: Teaching Resources (第二部分：教学资源)
1．A text structure analysis of A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
I. Type of writing and summary of the idea
Type of writing This is a piece of narrative writing.
Main idea of the passage
Being a agriculture professor Yuan Longping has been searching for a way to increase rice harvests without expanding the area of fields. Super hybrid rice invented by his group turns out to be the best way out. Thus he is given the name of “Father of Hybrid Rice”.
Topic sentence of 1st paragraph Dr. Yuan grows what is called super hybrid rice.
Topic sentence of 2nd paragraph Yuan’s hybrid rice produces harvests twice as large as before.
Topic sentence of 3rd paragraph Professor Yuan gives millions of yuan to equip others for their research in agriculture.
Topic sentence of 4th paragraph Dr. Yuan dreams that his rice can be exported to more foreign countries.
II. A tree diagram of A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
III. A retold passage of the text of A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
A possible version
Yuan Longping is a man who works the land, does his research and grows hybrid rice. He is an agricultural pioneer to have a high output of rice without expanding the area of fields. He devotes his whole life to finding ways to increase the rice output, to feed both the Chinese and the world people. He is circulating his knowledge so that more farmers can be free from hunger and satisfied with their lives. Yuan cares little about his money and fame. He keeps his time for teaching farmers and growing rice. He wish for more cheep rice for all the people. Yuan Long ping is a great person.
2．Background information on Women of achievement
I. Yuan Longping, China's Most Famous “Farmer”
(2001.02.19 21:59:30 Xin Hua News Service)
CHANGSHA, February 19 (Xinhuanet) -- It says every scientist cherishes a childhood dream indicating his or her future success, but for Yuan Longping, dubbed as “father of hybrid rice,” the dream is that he cultivates rice as plump as peanuts, and farmers can relax in the cool shadow of big rice plants.
Yuan, 71, won a 5 million yuan State Supreme Science and Technology Award today, known as the Nobel Prize in China, for his outstanding achievements in breeding high-yield hybrid rice, which has substantially increased China's grain output.
Yuan came up with the idea of hybridizing rice for the first time in the world in 1960s. Since then, 50 percent of China's total rice cultivation fields have grown such rice, which added some 300 billion kilograms to the country's grain output.
Furrows grown on his sunburnt face, a slim figure and coiled-up trousers legs would confuse foreign reporters who came to interview the most famous scientist in China, who would rather be called “a farmer.”
Indeed, like many Chinese farmers, Yuan in his 70s and has devoted most of his life growing rice in paddy fields, but unlike those farmers, he reaps the seed from experimental fields only for hybridizing rice.
The urbanite-turned-farmer graduated from Southwest Agriculture College in 1953 has his name related to the world's most advanced agricultural technology. Four minor planets, a listed seed company 's and a science college in China were named after him, which were the first time that a Chinese scientist's name is valued for its intellectual assets.
Is organic food safe?
Yes. Organic food is as safe to consume as any other kind of food. Just as with any kind of produce, consumers should wash before consuming to ensure maximum cleanliness. As cited above, organic produce contains significantly lower levels of pesticide residues than conventional produce. It is a common misconception that organic food could be at greater risk of E. coli contamination because of raw manure application although conventional farmers commonly apply tons of raw manure as well with no regulation whatsoever. Organic standards set strict guidelines on manure use in organic farming: either it must be first composted, or it must be applied at least 90 days before harvest, which allows ample time for microbial breakdown of any pathogens.
By lending his name to the Longping High-tech, a seed company, Yuan obtained a 5 per cent stake, or 2.5 million shares worth 2 million yuan, in the firm.
However, Yuan said his research requires the lifestyle of a farmer, or rather a migrating farmer, as he has conducted extensive research related to the cultivation of new strains of hybrid rice “Super Hybrid Rice” in some 10 provinces.
In the year 1999, more than 300 billion kilograms of grain were increased from about 240 million hectares of hybrid rice, which signified the success of his research. And this made Yuan firmly believe that China can surely feed her 1.2 billion population with her limited cultivated land.
The “Super Rice” yields are 30 percent higher than those of common rice. The record yield of 17,055 kilograms per hectare was registered in Yongsheng County in Yunnan in 1999.
But even after that achievement Yuan won't take a break. He has a dream, more realistic than that of his young age, that popularizing new strains of grain with higher yields around the world, can eliminate starvation on earth.
The UN Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) has vowed to get involved in the work of spreading the coverage of Yuan's high- yield hybrid rice, which it considers the best way to increase the world's grain output.
How do organic farmers fertilize crops? How do they control pests, diseases, and weeds?
Organic farmers build healthy soils by nourishing the living component of the soil, the microbial inhabitants that release, transform, and transfer nutrients. Soil organic matter contributes to good soil structure and water-holding capacity. Organic farmers feed soil biota and build soil structure and water-holding capacity. Organic farmers feed soil biota and build soil organic matter with cover crops, compost, and biologically based soil amendments. These produce healthy plants that are better able to resist disease and insect predation. Organic farmers' primary strategy in controlling pests and diseases is prevention through good plant nutrition and management. Organic farmers use cover crops and sophisticated crop rotations to change the field ecology, effectively disrupting habitat for weeds, insects, and disease organisms. Weeds are controlled through crop rotation, mechanical tillage, and hand-weeding, as well as through cover crops, mulches, flame weeding, and other management methods. Organic farmers rely on a diverse population of soil organisms, beneficial insects, and birds to keep pests in check. When pest populations get out of balance, growers implement a variety of strategies such as the use of insect predators, mating disruption, traps and barriers. Under the National Organic Rule, growers are required to use sanitation and cultural practices first before they can resort to applying a material to control a weed, pest or disease problem. Use of these materials in organic production is regulated, strictly monitored, and documented. As a last resort, certain botanical or other non-synthetic pesticides may be applied.
The FAO's 1991 statistics show that 20 percent of the world's rice output was yielded from 10 percent of the world's rice fields, which grow hybrid rice.
“If the new strain was sown in the rest of the rice acreage, the present grain output around the world can be more than doubled. This can be a solution to the grain shortage,” said the unselfish scientist.
In 1980, Yuan went to the United States at the invitation of the International Rice Research Institute to share his knowledge about the cultivation technology of hybrid rice. He was also employed in 1991 as the chief consultant of FAO to bring his research methods to other countries.
With the help of Chinese scientists, the acreage of hybrid rice in Viet Nam and India increased to 200,000 hectares and 150,000 hectares in 1999, respectively.
The rice research costs time to prove its value. At the age of 43, Yuan cultivated the world's first hybrid rice. At that time the country's grain yield was about 4,500 kilogram per hectare.
“The natural disaster and policy miscarriage further deteriorated starvation in China by then,” Yuan recalled tearfully.
This is his motivation to stimulate his research. Largely due to his scientific progress, China's total rice output rose from 5. 69 billion tons in 1950 to 19.47 billion tons last year. The growth rate of rice output far exceeded the population growth speed.
Some people estimate Yuan's actual fortune might amount to more than 100 million yuan (12 million U.S. dollars), making him one of the richest people in China. But he doesn't know for sure himself, for he seems not to care about his own assets than the rice harvest.
Some people asked him to move the focus of his research from improving amounts of hybrid rice to the quality and taste, which would be easier to do. But, the stubborn academician insisted that the amount of hybrid rice's per unit yield still outweighs the quality, for his foremost task is to improve the grain reserve in developing countries. Enditem
2.
What is organic farming?
Organic refers to agricultural production systems used to produce food and fiber. All kinds of agricultural products are produced organically, including produce, grains, meat, dairy, eggs, fibers such as cotton, flowers, and processed food products. Organic farming management relies on developing biological diversity in the field to disrupt habitat for pest organisms, and the purposeful maintenance and replenishment of soil fertility. Organic farmers are not allowed to use synthetic pesticides or fertilizers. Some of the essential characteristics of organic systems include: design and implementation of an “organic system plan” that describes the practices used in producing crops and livestock products; a detailed recordkeeping system that tracks all products from the field to point of sale; and maintenance of buffer zones to prevent inadvertent contamination from adjacent conventional fields.
3．Words and expressions from Unit 2 Working the land
I. Words for Reading
hunger n. 饥饿，欲望；vt. & vi. (使)饥饿：feel hunger, die of hunger, have a hunger for fame， hunger for [after] friends 渴望朋友
sunburn vt. & vi. 日晒：She sunburns easily. 她很容易晒黑。 get sunburnt 晒黑
sunburnt a. 晒黑的：a sunburnt face
struggle vt. & vi. 斗争，努力：struggle to get out， struggle with [against]…, struggle for…
super a. 特级的： a super star, a super software, a super highway
hybrid a. 混合的：hybrid news, Hybrid cars take hold in US. 混合（动力）汽车登陆美国市场。
output n. 产量，输出：the daily output of a factory, the monthly output of TV sets
strain n. 种类：come of a good strain 出自名门，new HIV strain 爱滋病新变种
expand vt. & vi. 使变大：expand one’s wings, expand one’s business, expand…into…, expand into…
circulate vt. & vi. 循环，传播：Blood circulates in the body., He circulated a false rumor.
rid…of 摆脱， 除去：We have to rid the garden of weeds. At last I’m rid of debt.
satisfied a. 满意的：be satisfied with…, be satisfied to do sth., be satisfied of…确信……， be satisfied that… 确信……
lead a … life： 过……生活
equip vt. & vi. 配备：equip sb. with… 给某人配上，be equipped with…
freedom n. 自由：have the freedom to do sth., freedom of speech, enjoy freedom from poverty 享受免于贫困的生活 / The French philosopher Jean-Jacques Rousseau asserted that the condition of freedom was inherent to humanity, an inevitable facet of the possession of a soul and sapience, with the implication that all social interactions subsequent to birth imply a loss of freedom, voluntary or involuntary.
would rather宁愿，宁可：I would rather not go. I would rather drink tea than coffee.
violin n. 小提琴：play the violin, play music on the violin, He is the first violin. 他是第一小提琴手。
motorcycle n. 摩托车：ride a motorcycle, the motorcycle riders
sorghum n. 高粱：grain sorghum production，sorghum flour高粱面，sweet sorghum growing at a research station in China
grain n．谷物；粮食；颗粒：grain sorghum, a grain of rice, grains of sands, grind grain into flour把谷物磨成粉
peanut n. 花生：a peanut farmer, a peanut grower, spread peanut on the bread 把花生酱抹在面包上
export vt. & vi. 输出， 出口：export… to a country 向某国出口某物
II. Words for Learning about Language
suitable a. 合适的；适当的：be suitable for…， a suitable answer， be suitable to do sth.
darken vt. & vi. (使)变暗；(使)变黑：He darkened the room by turning out the light. The sky darkened as the storm approached.
organic a. 有机的；器官的：organic life生物, organic farming 有机农业耕作
chemical a. 化学的；关于化学的：a chemical change, 化学变化, a chemical experiment 化学实验
fertilizer n. 肥料，化肥：fertilizer manufacturing company，a fertilizer spreader化肥撒播器
III. Words for Using Language
(ORGANIC FARMING)
refer to查阅：谈到，指的是：refer to it indirectly 间接提到它，refer to web documents 查阅我的网页
mineral n. 矿物， 矿石：mineral exploration and mining 矿物勘探和开采，Ministry of Lands and Mineral Resources 土地和矿产资源部/ Minerals are natural compounds formed through geological processes. The term “mineral” encompasses not only the material's chemical composition but also the mineral structures. Minerals range in composition from pure elements and simple salts to very complex silicates with thousands of known forms (organic compounds are usually excluded). The study of minerals is called mineralogy.
fertile a. (指土地)肥沃的：fertile land, a fertile imagination丰富的想象, a place fertile of wheat 盛产小麦的地方
reduce vt. 减少：reduce… to… 把……减少到……， reduce staff裁员
supply n. vt. 补给， 供应：supply sb. with…，supply… to sb. , have enough supply of food
bacteria n. 细菌：I do not know how bacteria spreads. / Bacteria (singular, bacterium) are a major group of living organisms. They are microscopic and mostly unicellular, with a relatively simple cell structure lacking a cell nucleus, cytoskeleton, and organelles such as mitochondria and chloroplasts. Their cell structure is further described in the article about prokaryotes, because bacteria are prokaryotes, in contrast to organisms with more complex cells, called eukaryotes. The term “bacteria” has variously applied to all prokaryotes or to a major group of them, depending on ideas about their relationships.
pest n. 害虫：pest control technicians 害虫控制技术员， natural enemies of pest species 害虫的天敌
soybean n. 大豆：soybean products，soybean farmers，soybean grower，in many soybean growing regions
level n. 水平，级别：a high level of civilization, above [below] the ordinary level, attain the world level
whatever pron. 凡是……；无论什么 a. 无论怎样的：eat whatever you like, Whatever you do, do your best.
summary n. 总结；摘要：a summary of the discussion, the Summary Report
exchange vt. & n. 交换，兑换；exchange sth. with sb. 与某人互换某物， exchange A for B ，以A交换B
nutrition n. 营养；食物：Public Health and Nutrition Research，learn about eggs and good nutrition/ Nutrition is interpreted as the study of the organic process by which an organism assimilates and uses food and liquids for normal functioning, growth and maintenance and to maintain the balance between health and disease. Also included is the idea of an optimal balance of nutrients and whole foods, to enable the optimal performance of the body.
certain a. 确定的；必然的：be certain that, be certain why, be certain of, be certain to do sth. It is certain that, for certain, make certain
Unit 3 A taste of English humour
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
1. A sample lesson plan for reading
(NONVERBAL HUMOUR)
Aims
To help students develop their reading ability.
To help students learn about English humour.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by defining “Humour”
What is “Humour”? Does any one of you know anything about humour? Look at the sreen and read the definition of Humour from the Internet.
temper: a characteristic (habitual or relatively temporary) state of feeling; “whether he praised or cursed me depended on his temper at the time”; “he was in a bad humor”
wit: a message whose ingenuity or verbal skill or incongruity has the power to evoke laughter
humor: (Middle Ages) one of the four fluids in the body whose balance was believed to determine your emotional and physical state; “the humors are blood and phlegm and yellow and black bile”
liquid body substance: the liquid parts of the body
humor: the quality of being funny; “I fail to see the humor in it”
humor: the trait of appreciating (and being able to express) the humorous; “she didn't appreciate my humor”; “you can't survive in the army without a sense of humor”
humor: put into a good mood
Warming up watching and listening
Hi, everyone! We are going to learn about A taste of English humour today. Now watch the slides/ pictures and listen to the English humour poems.
Why worry?
There are only two things to worry about:
Either you are well or you are sick.
If you are well, then there is nothing to worry about.
If you are sick, there are two things to worry about:
Either you will get well or you will die.
If you get well, then there is nothing to worry about.
If you die, there are only two things to worry about:
Either you will go to Heaven or Hell.
If you go to Heaven, there is nothing to worry about.
But if you go to Hell, you will be so damn busy
Shaking hands with friends, you wont have time to worry.
Whose job ...?
This is the story about four people named Everybody,
Somebody, Anybody and Nobody.
There was an important job to be done,
and Everybody was sure that Somebody would do it.
Anybody could have done it, but Nobody did it.
Somebody got angry about that
because it was Everybodys job.
Everybody thought Anybody could do it,
but Nobody realised that Everybody wouldnt do it.
It ended up that Everybody blamed Somebody
When Nobody did what Anybody could have done
II. Pre-reading
Telling the truth -Why do you like to laugh at?
I like to laugh at cartoons,for they’re lovely and fun.
I like to laugh at fairy tales. They are amusing and interesting.
Many years ago there lived an Emperor who was so exceedingly fond of fine new clothes that he spent vast sums of money on dress. To him clothes meant more than anything else in the world. He took no interest in his army, nor did he care to go to the theatre, or to drive about in his state coach, unless it was to display his new clothes. He had different robes for every single hour of the day.
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text NONVERBAL HUMOUR. Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses between the thought groups. I will play the tape twice and you shall read aloud twice, too.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from NONVERBAL HUMOUR
Slide on…, bump into…, round a corner, fall down…, in the road, see other people’s bad luck, at times, feel content with…, be worse off, astonish… with…, inspire…in sb., play a character, be born in poverty, become famous, use a particular form of acting, ancarry entertaining silent movie, a charming character, be well known throughout the world, play a poor and homeless person, wear large trousers, carry a walking stick, a social failure, be loved by…, overcome difficulties, be unkind to …, make…entertaining, a sad situation, a boiled shoe, make… funny, use nonverbal humour, in the middle of the nineteenth century, discover gold, in search of…, rush there, pan for gold, wash… from…, in a pan of water, pick up…, be fortunate enough, be cought on the edge of…, in a snowstorm, in a small wooden house, have nothing to eat, boil a pair of leather shoes, sit down at a table, a drinking cup, pick out…, cut off…, treat… as if…, eat every monthful with enjoyment, direct a movie, give… a special Oscar, one’s lifetime outstanding work, live one’s life in…,
3. Reading to identify the topic sentence of each paragrap
Skim the text and identify the topic sentence of each paragraph. You may find it either at the beginning, the middle or the end of the paragraph.
4. Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table.
NONVERBAL HUMOUR
What is nonverbal humour?
Who is Charlie Chaplin?
How does he make a sad situation entertaining?
What is the story of The Gold Rush?
Facts about Oscar
A brief life history of Charlie Chaplin
5. Reading and understanding difficult sentences
As you have read the text times, you can surely tell which sentences are difficult to understand. Now put your questions concerning the difficult points to me the teacher.
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises No. 1and 2 on pages 18 and 19.
Closing down by watching a silent movie by Charlie Chaplin
Do you like watching movies? Do you like humourous movies? Now let’s watch a silent humourous movie by Charlie Chaplin. It’s Charlie Chaplin's first film: Making a Living
Closing down by reading about Charlie Chaplin
To end the period we shall read an article about Charlie Chaplin. Now look at the screen and read it aloud with me.
Charlie Chaplin (April 16, 1889 - December 25, 1977)
Charlie Chaplin, who brought laughter to millions worldwide as the silent “Little Tramp” clown, had the type of deprived childhood that one would expect to find in a Dickens novel. Born in East Street, Walworth, London on 16 April, 1889, Charles Spencer Chaplin was the son of a music hall singer and his wife. Charlie Chaplin's parents divorced early in his life, with his father providing little to no support, either financial or otherwise, leaving his mother to support them as best she could. Chaplin's mother Hannah was the brightest spot in Charlie's childhood; formerly an actor on stage, she had lost her ability to perform, and managed to earn a subsistence living for herself, Charlie, and Charlie's older half-brother Sidney by sewing. She was an integral part of Charlie's young life, and he credited her with much of his success. Sadly, she slowly succumbed to mental illness, and by the time that Charlie was 7 years old, she was confined to an asylum; Charlie and Sidney were relegated to a workhouse (a government facility for orphaned and abandoned children) -- not for the last time. After 2 months, she was released, and the family was happily reunited, for a time. In later years, she was readmitted for an 8-month stretch later, during which time Charlie lived with his alcoholic father and stepmother, in a strained environment.
2．A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The –ing form as the Predicative, Attributive & Object)
Aims
To help students learn about The –ing form as the Predicative, Attributive & Object)
To help students discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful structures.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 19 and do exercises No. 1, 2 , 3, 4 and 5. Check your answers against your classmates’.
II. Learning about The –ing form as the Attributive
What is attributive? It is something placed before the nouns to be modified: “red” is an attributive adjective in “a red apple”. “walking ” is also an attributive adjective in “a walking stick”.
The –ing form as the Attributive
The –ing form作定语时表示该动作正在进行。单个The –ing form作定语通常放在被修饰词的前面. The –ing form短语作定语则放在被修饰词之后。如:
The rising sun looks very beautiful. 冉冉升起的太阳看上去很美。
若被修饰词与The –ing form是被动关系时,须用The –ing form的被动式(being done)作定语。如:
The song being broadcast is very popular with the young students. 正在播放的歌曲深受青年学生的欢迎。
注意The –ing form作定语与所修饰的名词有逻辑上的主谓关系,或表示作用与用途。如:
Let sleeping dogs lie. 别招惹麻烦。(The –ing form相当于定语从句 which are sleeping)
I think some sleeping pills may help you. 我想安眠药可以助你入睡。(The –ing form表示用途,相当于pills for sleeping)
III. Ready used materials for The –ing form as the Predicative, Attributive & Object
Which verbs can be followed by the -ing form?
One of the most important simple principles that grammarians tend to miss is the one that explains what verbs take the -ing form. The method of almost all books on English grammar is to give a list of such verbs. This implies that it is completely arbitrary whether a verb takes the -ing form or not, that God has closed his eyes and pricked off verbs here and there at random with a pin. Students are thus cut off from insight into a basic pattern of meaning, and confronted with a lifeless series of unconnected words which they have to learn by heart. They are pushed into a purely mechanical process that misses the essential truth that learning languages is learning about meanings and their logical connections to other meanings. It is significant of the impractical arbitrariness of these lists that there are almost no two of them that are the same, even where the most common of the verbs used with -ing are concerned.
When contrasting the -ing form with the infinitive, the basic point to remember is that
-ing can always mean, among other things, a verb-noun, an
'action-thing'.
The fact that -ing can always mean a 'thing' gives us the following practical principle:
If you can say I (etc.) - verb - it (e.g. I like it), you can use I - verb -ing (e.g. I like eating).
Avoid it. Avoid stepping on the grass if you can.
Do you mind it? Do you mind shutting the window?
He couldn't risk it. He couldn't risk hurting the children.
This is a principle virtually without exceptions. But naturally there are many verbs that in practice are never used with -ing simply because nobody ever wants to express that 'action' meaning of -ing with them. The process is always self-regulating, so to speak - one says whatever makes sense. We can look at some examples of the use of -ing with verbs that appear on few, if any, of most grammarians' lists.
They have added mistreating prisoners to the list of charges.
I can't really afford living like this.
The council no longer allows smoking in public buildings.
aim - (It is hard to think of a sensible example of -ing being used with this verb. Can you?)
The club arranges dancing for the pensioners.
The chairman claimed breaking the strike as a great triumph.
I don't count making money as a virtue.
The investigators discovered cheating on a huge scale.
We must encourage planting earlier in the season.
I thank travelling for teaching me much about the human condition.
The principle applies equally to phrasal verbs, both the 'prepositional' type and the 'adverbial particle' type.
She insisted on helping me.
Bill's putting off writing till tomorrow. (Or: ...putting writing off..)
The managing director picked out idling on the job as the main cause of the declining profits.
turn up - (Another example of a verb I am unable to think of any sensible use for with -ing.)
(Notice that in the second and third sentences above, an it used instead of the -ing form would come between putting and off and between picked and out.)
There are uses of -ing which appear to contradict the it-substitution principle. Two examples of them involve expressions that both have the sense of continue: carry on and go on. One can say Carry on talking, but not *Carry on it. That, however, is merely because unemphasized pronouns are never used at the end of phrasal verb phrases (e.g. in a dictionary one looks it up, not *looks up it). With go on one cannot even say *go it on. This again can be explained simply. One does not *go a thing, while with the sense of continue one does not say *go on it for the same reason that one does not say *Carry on it.
IV. Closing down
Closing down by discovering
To end the period you are going to skim the text and the previous texts to find out all the examples containing –ing forms used as the predicative, attributive and object.
Closing down by exercises
In the last few minutes you are to do exercises 1, 2, 3 and 4 on page 21. Check your answers against those of your groupmates’
3． A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(Jokes about Sherlock Holmes and Doctor Watson)
Aims
To help students read the paragraph of Jokes about Sherlock Holmes and Doctor Watson
To help students to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by reading school jokes
There are lots of jokes in English about school life. Read these two to see whether you will laugh or not.
Why must we learn this? 为什么要学这个呀？
One day our professor was discussing a particularly complicated concept. A pre-med student rudely interrupted to ask, “Why do we have to learn this pointless information”
“To save lives.” the professor responded quickly and continued the lecture.
A few minutes later, the same student spoke up again. “So how does physics save lives?” he persisted.
“It keeps the ignoramuses like you out of medical school,” replied the professor.
I will do anything to pass 说啥也要考个及格
A student comes to a young professor's office hours. She glances down the hall, closes his door, kneels pleadingly.
“I would do anything to pass this exam.” She leans closer to him, flips back her hair, gazes meaningfully into his eyes. “I mean...” she whispers, “...I would do...anything.”
He returns her gaze. “Anything?”
“Anything.”
His voice softens. “Anything??”
“Absolutely anything.”
His voice turns to a whisper. “Would you...study?”
II. Guided reading
1． Reading and translating
Read the paragraph on page 22 and translate it into Chinese sentence by sentence.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read the paragph and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in it. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from the paragraph on page 22
Go camp, in a mountainous area, lie in the open air, under the stars, look up at the stars, think of…, try a third time, in one’s beds
3. Doing the exercise
Now you are going to do the exercise No. 1 on page 22.
III.Guided Speaking
Think of funny stories in English and telll them to your group mates.
________________________________________
The Student and the Pharmacist 学生和药剂师
A somewhat advanced society has figured how to package basic knowledge in pill form. A student, needing some learning, goes to the pharmacy and asks what kind of knowledge pills are available.
The pharmacist says, “Here's a pill for English literature.” The student takes the pill and swallows it and has new knowledge about English literature!
“What else do you have?” asks the student. “Well, I have pills for art history, biology, and world history,” replies the pharmacist.
The student asks for these, and swallows them and has new knowledge about those subjects. Then the student asks, “Do you have a pill for math?”
The pharmacist says, “Wait just a moment,” and goes back into the storeroom and brings back a whopper of a pill and plunks it on the counter.
“I have to take that huge pill for math?” inquires the student. The pharmacist replied, “Well, you know... math always was a little hard to swallow.”
Out of the mouths of babes 出自孩子之口
My two and a half year old grandson lives with his mother. Her roommate also has a two and a half year old child, a daughter. A few days ago they were playing together and my grandson noting that his playmate's stomach was exposed ,took his forefinger and poked her belly button. She thought that this was great and they both had a laugh about it.
Sometime later his playmate raised her arms inviting my grandson to poke her belly button again. As he moved his forefinger toward her for a repeat performance, she suddenly lowered her arms, backed away and said, “No! I have a headache.”
IV.Guided Writing-Learn to write jokes
There are two main parts to the structure of a joke. The first prepares you for the laugh by telling a story which creates a sense of expectation. The second part of the joke, the punch line, provokes laughter by telling an unexpected and different story, yet one which is still compatible with the first, as in this example: “My wife just ran off with my best friend. Boy, do I miss him.” and “I had a mud pack facial done, and for three days my face looked much better. Then the mud fell off.” Notice the assumption that is made in both these examples. In the first, you assume the person telling the story is angry with his wife, so the punch line surprises you because he's feeling something different and unexpected. Again, in the second example, you'd most likely assume the mud had been removed, leaving the face looking better, so the punch line takes you by surprise.
So, to write jokes you need to practice reading statements and writing down the asumptions you make about them. You must be able to interpret the statement (first story line) in at least two different ways in order to provide the second, different story i.e. the punch line. And what to write about? Anything that interests you. Anything you have strong opinions about.
Now write down your own jokes, in English.
IV. Closing down by acting
To end this period, we are going to act the film by Charlie Chaplin The Great Dictator.
The Great Dictator 大独裁者
Schulz: Speak - it is our only hope.
The Jewish Barber (Charlie Chaplin's character): Hope... I'm sorry but I don't want to be an Emperor - that's not my business - I don't want to rule or conquer anyone. I should like to help everyone if possible, Jew, gentile, black man, white. We all want to help one another, human beings are like that.
We all want to live by each other's happiness, not by each other's misery. We don't want to hate and despise one another. In this world there is room for everyone and the earth is rich and can provide for everyone.
The way of life can be free and beautiful.
But we have lost the way.
Greed has poisoned men's souls - has barricaded the world with hate; has goose-stepped us into misery and bloodshed.
We have developed speed but we have shut ourselves in: machinery that gives abundance has left us in want. Our knowledge has made us cynical, our cleverness hard and unkind. We think too much and feel too little: More than machinery we need humanity; More than cleverness we need kindness and gentleness.
Without these qualities, life will be violent and all will be lost.
The aeroplane and the radio have brought us closer together. The very nature of these inventions cries out for the goodness in men, cries out for universal brotherhood for the unity of us all. Even now my voice is reaching millions throughout the world, millions of despairing men, women and little children, victims of a system that makes men torture and imprison innocent people. To those who can hear me I say “Do not despair”.
The misery that is now upon us is but the passing of greed, the bitterness of men who fear the way of human progress: the hate of men will pass and dictators die and the power they took from the people, will return to the people and so long as men die [now] liberty will never perish...
Soldiers - don't give yourselves to brutes, men who despise you and enslave you - who regiment your lives, tell you what to do, what to think and what to feel, who drill you, diet you, treat you as cattle, as cannon fodder.
Don't give yourselves to these unnatural men, machine men, with machine minds and machine hearts. You are not machines. You are not cattle. You are men. You have the love of humanity in your hearts. You don't hate - only the unloved hate. Only the unloved and the unnatural. Soldiers - don't fight for slavery, fight for liberty.
In the seventeenth chapter of Saint Luke it is written “ the kingdom of God is within man ” - not one man, nor a group of men - but in all men - in you, the people.
You the people have the power, the power to create machines, the power to create happiness. You the people have the power to make life free and beautiful, to make this life a wonderful adventure. Then in the name of democracy let's use that power - let us all unite. Let us fight for a new world, a decent world that will give men a chance to work, that will give you the future and old age and security. By the promise of these things, brutes have risen to power, but they lie. They do not fulfil their promise, they never will. Dictators free themselves but they enslave the people. Now let us fight to fulfil that promise. Let us fight to free the world, to do away with national barriers, do away with greed, with hate and intolerance. Let us fight for a world of reason, a world where science and progress will lead to all men's happiness.
Soldiers - in the name of democracy, let us all unite!
Look up! Look up! The clouds are lifting - the sun is breaking through. We are coming out of the darkness into the light. We are coming into a new world. A kind new world where men will rise above their hate and brutality.
The soul of man has been given wings - and at last he is beginning to fly. He is flying into the rainbow - into the light of hope - into the future, that glorious future that belongs to you, to me and to all of us. Look up. Look up.“
Part Two: Teaching Resources (第二部分：教学资源)
1．A text structure analysis of NONVERBAL HUMOUR
I. Type of writing and summary of the idea
Type of writing This is a piece of describtive writing.
Main idea of the passage
Charlie Chaplin astonishes us with the deep feelings he can inspire in us for a character he is playing.
Topic sentence of 1st paragraph Some humour can be cruel.
Topic sentence of 2nd paragraph Charlie Chaplin is such an actor as to astonish us with the deep feelings.
Topic sentence of 3rd paragraph How did Charlie Chaplin make a sad situation entertaining?
Topic sentence of 4th paragraph The film of The Gold Rush is set in California.
Topic sentence of 5th paragraph Charlie Chaplin produced, directed, and wrote the movies he starred in.
II. A tree diagram of the text THEME PARKS -FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
III. A retold passage of the text
A possible version:
Sliding on a banana skin. Bumping into someone. Falling down a hole. These are some of the funny things we like to see other people doing. We feel content with ourselves because these other people are worse off than we are. And this feeling is so called “humour”.
Charlie Chaplin is a humourous actor. He astonishes us with humourous feelings he inspired in us. Born in poverty, he became famous by using a particular form of acting in entertaining silent movies. He was a charming character, being well known throughout the world. He played a poor and homeless person, wearing large trousers, carrying a walking stick. Be a social failure, he was, in the movies, loved by all the people. By overcoming difficulties, by being kind to people unkind to him, by making a sad situation entertaining, by eating a boiled shoe, Charlie Chaplin make us happy and excited. His use of nonverbal humour excellent in the film The Gold Runed in the middle of the nineteenth century in ,California where gold was dicovered. In search of gold people rushed there, panning for gold, washing gold from water in a pan of water, hoping to ipick up gold.
Such is Charlie Chaplin who produced, directed, and wrote movies that he starred in. He was given a special Oscar in 1972 for his lifetime outstanding work of bringing humour to us all.
2．Background information on theme parks
I. Six ways to improve your nonverbal communications
1. Eye contact:
Eye contact, an important channel of interpersonal communication, helps regulate the flow of communication. And it signals interest in others. Furthermore, eye contact with audiences increases the speaker's credibility. Teachers who make eye contact open the flow of communication and convey interest, concern, warmth and credibility.
2. Facial expressions:
Smiling is a powerful cue that transmits:
Happiness
Friendliness
Warmth
Liking
Affiliation
Thus, if you smile frequently you will be perceived as more likable, friendly, warm and approachable. Smiling is often contagious and students will react favorably and learn more.
3. Gestures:
If you fail to gesture while speaking, you may be perceived as boring, stiff and unanimated. A lively and animated teaching style captures students' attention, makes the material more interesting, facilitates learning and provides a bit of entertainment. Head nods, a form of gestures, communicate positive reinforcement to students and indicate that you are listening.
4. Posture and body orientation:
You communicate numerous messages by the way you walk, talk, stand and sit. Standing erect, but not rigid, and leaning slightly forward communicates to students that you are approachable, receptive and friendly. Furthermore, interpersonal closeness results when you and your students face each other. Speaking with your back turned or looking at the floor or ceiling should be avoided; it communicates disinterest to your class.
5. Proximity:
Cultural norms dictate a comfortable distance for interaction with students. You should look for signals of discomfort caused by invading students' space. Some of these are:
Rocking
Leg swinging
Tapping
Gaze aversion
Typically, in large college classes space invasion is not a problem. In fact, there is usually too much distance. To counteract this, move around the classroom to increase interaction with your students. Increasing proximity enables you to make better eye contact and increases the opportunities for students to speak.
6. Paralinguistics:
This facet of nonverbal communication includes such vocal elements as:
Tone
Pitch
Rhythm
Timbre
Loudness
Inflection
For maximum teaching effectiveness, learn to vary these six elements of your voice. One of the major criticisms is of instructors who speak in a monotone. Listeners perceive these instructors as boring and dull. Students report that they learn less and lose interest more quickly when listening to teachers who have not learned to modulate their voices.
7. Humor:
Humor is often overlooked as a teaching tool, and it is too often not encouraged in college classrooms. Laughter releases stress and tension for both instructor and student. You should develop the ability to laugh at yourself and encourage students to do the same. It fosters a friendly classroom environment that facilitates learning. (Lou Holtz wrote that when his players felt successful he always observed the presence of good humor in the locker room.)
Obviously, adequate knowledge of the subject matter is crucial to your success; however, it's not the only crucial element. Creating a climate that facilitates learning and retention demands good nonverbal and verbal skills. To improve your nonverbal skills, record your speaking on video tape. Then ask a colleague in communications to suggest refinements.
II. Biography of Charlie Chaplin
Charlie Chaplin was born Charles Spencer Chaplin in London, England on 16 April 1889. His parents, Charles Chaplin, Sr and Hannah Hill were music hall entertainers but separated shortly after Charlie was born, leaving Hannah to provide for her children. In 1896 when Hannah was no longer able to care for her children, Charlie and his brother Sydney were admitted to Lambeth Workhouse and later, Hanwell School for Orphans and Destitute Children.
Charlie had already debuted in the music hall in 1894, when he had sung a song after his mother was taken hoarse.
1903-1906
Performs in Sherlock Holmes, as the newspaper boy Billy
1906-1907
The Casey Circus
1907-1910
Works with the Karno Pantomime Troupe
1910-1912
First tour of USA/Canada with Karno Troupe
1912-1913
Second tour of USA/Canada with Karno Troupe
May 1913
Accepts offer from Adam Kessel (who has interests in the Keystone Film Company) for $125/week
29 December 1913
Signs contract with Keystone
Jan/Feb 1914
Charlie Chaplin's first film: Making a Living
1914
Keystone films
Nov 1914
Signs with Essanay for $1,250/week to make 14 films during 1915
1915
Essanay films
27 Feb 1916
Signs with Mutual Film Corporation for $10,000/week plus $150,000 bonus
1916-1917
Mutual films
17 June 1917
Signs with First National Exhibitor's Circuit for $1,075,000/year
2． Words and expressions from Unit 3 A taste of English humour
verbal a. verbal skill 运用语言的能力 I wrote a memorandum to confirm our verbal agreement. 我写了份备忘录以确认我们的口头协议。This is a verbal translation of the prose. 这是那篇散文的逐字直译。verbal forms 动词的形态
mime n. A mime is the representation of action, character or mood using only gestures and movements rather than words, or the actor in such a performance, specifically a mimic. To mime is also the term given to a singer who performs to a pre-recorded song and only pretends to sing live. It is usually limited to performances by Pop music artists.
In ancient Greece and ancient Rome, a mime is a farcical drama characterized by mimicry and ludicrous representations of characters, or the script for such a performance.
farce n. A farce is a comedy written for the stage, or a film, which aims to entertain the audience by means of unlikely and extravagant - yet often possible - situations, disguise and mistaken identity, verbal humour of varying degrees of sophistication, which may include puns and sexual innuendo, and a fast-paced plot whose speed usually increases even further towards the end of the play, often involving an elaborate chase scene. Broad physical humor, and deliberate absurdity or nonsense, are also commonly employed in farce.
poverty n. Poverty is any of a wide range of circumstances associated with need, hardship and lack of resources. For some, poverty is a subjective and comparative term; for others, it is moral and evaluative; and for others, scientifically established. The principal uses of the term include:
Descriptions of material need, including deprivation of essential goods and services, multiple deprivation, and patterns of deprivation over time.
Economic circumstances, describing a lack of wealth (usually understood as capital, money, material goods, or resources especially natural resources). The meaning of ”sufficient“ varies widely across the different political and economic areas of the world. In the European Union, poverty is also described in terms of ”economic distance“, or inequality.
Social relationships, including social exclusion, dependency, and the ability to live what is understood in a society as a ”normal“ life: for instance, to be capable of raising a healthy family, and especially educating children and participating in society.
A person living in the condition of poverty is said to be poor.
tramp n. A tramp is an itinerant who travels from place to place, traditionally tramping, that is, walking. While they may do odd jobs from time to time, tramps aren't looking for regular work and support themselves by other means i.e. begging or theft. This is in contrast to hobos who travel from place to place (often by stealing rides on freight trains) looking for work, or schnorrers, who travel from city to city begging. Both the terms tramp and hobo (and the distinction between them) were in common use between the 1880s and the 1940s, and were not limited to the Great Depression. Schnorrer is a Yiddish term. Like hobo and bum, tramp is somewhat archaic in American English usage, having been subsumed by the more euphemistic homeless person.
failure n. Failure in general refers to the state or condition of not meeting a desirable or intended objective. It may be viewed as the opposite of success.
Oscar n. The Academy Awards, commonly known as The Oscars, are the most prominent film awards in the world. The Awards are granted by the Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences, a professional honorary organization which as of 2003 had a voting membership of 5,816. Actors (with a membership of 1,311) make up the largest voting bloc. The most recent awards were the 77th Academy Awards.
fortune n. Fortune or fortune can refer to: Luck; Fortune magazine; The fortune Unix/Linux command; The name of a character from Metal Gear Solid 2: Sons of Liberty, a member of Dead Cell.
The goddess of fortune is Fortuna (or Tyche).
sense n. & v. She has no sense of time. 她没有时间观念。Your brother has a good sense of humor. 你兄弟很有幽默感。He is free from any sense of responsibility. 他丝毫没有责任感。He had the good sense to withdraw from the election contest. 他很明智,退出了竞选。
The word here is used in its figurative sense. 此词在这儿取的是它的比喻意义。Anyone in his right senses wouldn't do that. 神智清醒的人都不会去干那种事。What's the sense of arguing with him? 同他争论有什么用处呢? I sensed that I had made a serious mistake. 我意识到自己犯了个严重的错误。
Unit 5 Theme parks
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
1． A sample lesson plan for reading
(THEME PARKS --FUN AND MORE THAN FUN)
Aims
To help students develop their reading ability.
To help students learn about Theme parks.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discussing
Good morning, class. Today we are going to visit theme parks. But first what do you think a theme park is? With a classmate discuss what you might do in a theme park.
(For reference: A large Christmas party is being prepared at our Theme park. Visitors will find a dancing carnival, a European wedding, military band performances, classical Christmas plays and Christmas parades in the theme park. The 108-meter-tall Eiffel Tower will be lit up during the holidays with four types of lights.)
Warming up by watching and listening
Hi, every one. Today we are going to visit Theme parks. Look at the screen and listen to me telling you about them.
This is the Universal's Islands of Adventure which was opened in 1999, making Universal Orlando the nation's second multi-gate theme park resort (after Walt Disney World). IoA was Universal's first non-studio theme park, and was intended to pay tribute to characters from books, comics, cartoons and legend, rather than movies.
Of course, that hasn't stopped Universal and other studios from making films about almost every character represented in IoA over the past few years, rendering the park thematically indistinguishable from its sister, Universal Studios Florida.
Warming up telling experiences
Nice to see you again, boys and girls. As you have all travelled somewhere before I shall ask two of you at random to tell the class about their travel experiences.
(For reference: Visiting Disney World was a childhood dream of mine, and I was able to realise it last year. I plan to keep going back, even given the overt commercialism. It is not a place I could live in, but it definitely has magic.
One of the best parts was that I was able to interact with most of the Disney characters, even though their appearance and mannerisms varied from the Disney comic books I read. A few select pictures are included here, but my recommendation if you're taking a kid is to make sure they get some time with the characters. I can't think of anything cooler. )
II. Pre-reading
1. Looking and saying
Work in pairs. Look at the photos and theme parks and predict the contents of the text. When you are ready, join another pair and compare your predictions and the clues that helped you to make the predictions.
(For reference: From the photos and title I guess that the text tells about Theme parks where you can joy yourselves and have fun with various activities…
2. Talking and sharing
Work in groups of four. Tell your group mates what you know about theme parks. Then the group leader is to stand up and share your group idea with the class.
Boating Lake
Pedaloe boats on our boating lake with views of Megafobia. Suitable for up to five people.
(For reference: As you wander down Mainstreet USA in the Magic Kingdom Park of Walt Disney World, you might stop and take a peek in the Mainstreet Theatre. Here, Steamboat Willie shows how it all began depicting the first appearance of Mickey Mouse. At this point people usually stop for a bit, perhaps to rest from the hot Florida summer, laugh at Mickey's antics as he uses various animals as musical instruments (long before Beavis and Butthead were throwing cats in drying machines), and walk away amused and entertained.
That was Walt Disney's primary goal. Today, people might consider the first cartoon featuring Mickey as art, along with a host of other creative works produced by people who work at Disney. Notable among them are Carl Barks and Don Rosa, whose works sell in the thousands. However, Walt Disney himself never thought that what he, and his employees, did was art: ”I don't pretend to know anything about art. I make pictures for entertainment, and then the professors tell me what they mean.“ )
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text THEME PARKS --FUN AND MORE THAN FUN. Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence. I will play the tape twice and you shall read aloud twice, too.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from THEME PARKS --FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
provide sb. With sth., amuse oneself, escape one’s busy life for a while, share a purpose, find ways to do sth., meet one’s need, sit chatting, play games, listen to birds’ singing, relax a bit, have picnics, have fun, it costs some money to do sth., in recent decades, provide entertainment, use shuttles to get around, have a variety of things to see and do,
charge money for doing sth., make a profit, sell souvenirs, advertisie sth. on television, have a certain idea, base sth. on sth., a sports theme park, involve sb. inphysical exercise, buy a brand of sports equipment, come to life, go for rides on animals, cook cultural foods, have pictures taken, chare admission, name sb. after sb./sth., a place of fantasy, get close to sth. /sb., take an active park in experiments, go on trips to space, use computer techniques to do sth.
3. Reading to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph
Skim the text and identify the topic sentence of each paragraph. You may find it either at the beginning, the middle or the end of the paragraph.
Waterfall
A steep shoot sends you skipping across a shallow pool of water on a single sledge. Beware, you might get wet on this ride.
(For reference: 1st paragraph: Parks provide people with a place to amuse themselves and to escape their busy lives for a while. 2nd paragraph: Many parks have been designed to provide entertainment. 3rd paragraph: Theme parks have a certain idea- a certain theme-that the whole park is based on. 4th paragraph: Some are history or culture theme parks. 5th paragraph: The oldest theme park in the world is Disneyland, built near Los Angeles, California in 1955. 6th paragraph: There are also science theme parks. )
4. Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table.
THEME PARKS --FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
What is a park?
What is a theme park?
What is a sports theme park?
What are history or cultural theme parks?
Facts about Disneyland
Facts about marine, ocean, and science theme parks
5. Reading and understanding difficult sentences
As you have read the text times, you can surely tell which sentences are difficult to understand. Now put your questions concerning the difficult points to me the teacher.
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises No. 1, 2 and 3 on page 34.
Closing down by having a discussion
Do you lake a theme park? Why or why not?
(For reference: All over the world people seek stimulating experiences to take their mind away from everyday troubles, and the United States is definitely no exception to this rule. Most of its residents have the money and time to entertain themselves as it pleases them -- and visiting amusement parks certainly does please them. )
Closing down by defining a theme park
What is a theme park? Define it in your own words.
(For reference: How do theme parks differ from ordinary amusement parks? National Amusement Park History Association defines a theme park as ”an amusement park in which the rides, attractions, shows and buildings revolve around a central theme or group of themes. Examples include the Disney parks, the Six Flags Parks and the Paramount parks.“ An amusement park, according to NAPHA, is ”an entertainment facility featuring rides, games, food and sometimes shows.“ The World of Coasters’ glossary defines a theme park as ”an amusement park which has one or more “themed” areas, with rides and attractions keyed to the theme of their location within the park. Disneyland, Knotts Berry Farm, and Busch Gardens Williamsburg are examples of theme parks.“ )
2．A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(Word formation)
Aims
To help students learn about word formation.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful structures.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 35 and do exercises No. 1, 2 ,3 and 4 first. Check your answers against your classmates’.
II. Learning about Word formation
The basic part of any word is the root; to it, you can add a prefix at the beginning and/or a suffix at the end to change the meaning. For example, in the word ”unflattering,“ the root is simply ”flatter,“ while the prefix ”un-“ makes the word negative, and the suffix ”-ing“ changes it from a verb into an adjective (specifically, a participle).
English itself does not use prefixes as heavily as it once did, but many English words come from Latin, which uses prefixes and suffixes (you can use the word affix to refer either to a prefix or a suffix) quite extensively. For example, the words ”prefix,“ ”suffix,“ and ”affix“ themselves are all formed from ”fix“ by the used of prefixes:
”ad“ (to) + ”fix“ (attached) = ”affix“
”pre“ (before) + ”fix“ = ”prefix“
”sub“ (under) + ”fix“ = ”suffix“
Note that both the ”-d“ of ”ad“ and the ”-b“ of ”sub“ change the last letter.
Here are some of the most common Latin prefixes (for the meanings of the Latin roots, look up the words in a good dictionary):
ab (away) abrupt, absent, absolve
ad (to) adverb, advertisment, afflict
in (not) incapable, indecisive, intolerable
inter (between, among) intercept, interdependent, interprovincial
intra (within) intramural, intrapersonal, intraprovincial
pre (before) prefabricate, preface prefer
post (after) postpone, postscript, postwar
sub (under) submarine, subscription, suspect
trans (across) transfer, transit, translate
III. Ready used materials for Word formation
了解了英语构词法是迅速扩大词汇量的有效途径之一。英语中有转化法、合成法、缀合法、派生法等构词方式，这里我们将向您陆续讲解比较常用的几种，希望对您的英语学习有所帮助。
首先，来介绍一下构词法中的几个基本概念：
词根（base,boot）：指同根词共有的可以辨认的部分。
例如：philanthropist(慈善家)、anthropoid（类人的）、misanthropist（厌世者）、anthropology（人类学）这几个词中的词根anthropo-(人)就很容易辨认出来。
词干（stem）：是未经词形变化的原词。
前缀（prefix）和后缀(suffix)：原是独立的词或词根，由于经常缀在别的词或词根的前后，辅助中心意义，渐渐就失去了独立的意义和形式，而成为附加的构词部分。
例如：co-(with)就是一个常见的前缀。通常把带有前后缀的新词叫做合成词，也有人把带有后缀的词叫做派生词。把一个词从一种词类转成另一种词类，可以用缀合法，如red adj. (红的)-to redden v.（变红）；可以用改变词根的元音或辅音的办法，即元级派生法，如food n.(食物)-to feed v.（喂饭）；也可以原封不动，转成其他词类，如pale adj.(苍白的)--to pale v.（脸变白），即转化法。
这里，我们先来看看“转化法”中名词转成动词的一些例子。
He filmed the story. / He reproduced the story on a film.他把这篇小说拍成电影。
人身器官名称，用作动词，表示使用这种器官的动作。
例如：He shouldered his way through the crowd. (他用肩膀从人群中挤过去) 此外，如to cheek (厚着脸说)、to finger (摸索)、to hand a person（用手领着）等。
盛具或衣物的名称，用作动词，表示“盛”或者“装入”。
例如：He pocketed his book and pen. (他把钢笔、本子装进衣袋子)以及to bottle(装瓶)、to can (装罐)、to sack (装在袋里)。
表示地点的名词用作动词也有类似用法：to corner( 逼在角落)、to island(隔离)、to nursery(放在温室里)等等。
除此之外，还有动词、副词、助动词等转化成名词的用法，我们来看一些例子：
On another run they failed to see the boat.他们第二次去的时候没有找到那只船。
ins and outs (来龙去脉) back and forth(问答) a must ( 必不可少的事) many ifs（许多条件）
动词加副词转化为名词的例子也很多：Break-down(垮)、get-together(聚会)、set-back(挫折)、wash-out(废物)等。
另外，形容词有时候也可以转成名词，如：the greens(青菜)、great sillies(大蠢人)
下面，我们来学习一下“合成法（composition）”。
凡是由两个或两个以上的构词成分，合成一个词，而其中每个成分又可以独立为词的，叫做合成词（compounds）,而这种构词法，叫做合成法。比如：coal-mine(煤矿)、man-made(人造的)。
合成词的特有含义，不受词中各个成分连结方式的影响，它的写法由习惯而定，可以写在一起，如blackbird(画眉);可以用连词符号连接，如turn-coat(叛徒)；也可以分开写，如black list(黑名单)。注意，分开写的合成词，不仅仅在意义上，即使在形式上，也和词组有区别。比如black sea 里的black，不是独立的形容词，不能说very black sea。合成词各个成分之间关系千变万化，分类也有很多种，这里就合成词的词性，分类举例说明：
1.合成名词
名词+名词：前面的名词说明后面的名词，中心意义由后面的名词表达，比如，同是book,可以有account book，hand-book，note-book等等。前面的名词可以表示人、物、性别、器具、地点、时间、比喻对象等等。如：eye-shot(视力范围)、buck-rabbit（公兔）、night-school(夜校)、baby-husband（小女婿）等等。
形容词+名词：这类词意义关系一目了然，有时候是实指，有时候是指物而拟人。如Blueprints(蓝图)，big hat（大人物）,double-face(两面派)等等。
动名词+名词：动名词表示行为或状态的改变，名词往往表示所用的器物，地名等等，如consulting-room（诊室），writing-desk（写字台）。
动词+名词：往往由短语动词变成，或者是转化与合成的结合，如pickpocket(扒手)，turn-coat(叛徒)等等。
名词+动名词：很普遍，有时甚至可以随意构造，如book-learning（书本知识），word-making(构词)等等。
前置词+名词：意义关系和“形容词+名词”类型相似：after-effects(后果)，by-product(副产品)等等。
另外，国名的组合，有时候用“拉丁语+英语”的方式，如Afro-Asian People's Conference( 亚非会议)、Sino-Japanese War(中日战争)
Snake River Falls
Snake River Falls is a white water rapid boat ride comprising two open and two covered chutes. Suitable for one or two riders. You may get wet on this ride.
2. 合成形容词
形容词+名词：形容词和名词连用，原是短语，用做定语。固定下来，成为形容词，有的还只是nonce-words,也有合成名词作定语或转成形容词的情形：如full-time worker（全职工）、long-range gun(远程炮)等。
形容词+形容词：这类词不算多，前面的形容词大都进一步说明后面的形容词，如：light-blue(浅蓝)、dead-alive(半死不活)。
名词+过去分词：有被动意味，名词相当于前置词宾语，表示工具，行为者等，如:man-made(人造的)，moth-eaten(虫蛀的)。
名词+现在分词：有主动意味，名词大都相当于行为的宾语，如：English-speaking people(说英语的人)，peace-loving（热爱和平的）
形容词+现在分词：有主动意味，形容词相当于表语或者定语，如eager-seeming(样子急切)，easy-going（随和的）
副词+分词：如half-baked(幼稚的)，far-seeing（有远见的）
副词+形容词：over-anxious(过急)，all-round athlete(全能选手)
名词+形容词：名词大都作比喻的对象，如cock-sure(自恃)，paper-thin（薄如纸）
3.合成动词
合成动词大都是由“副词＋动词”组成的，这里“副词”多半表示动作的方向、程度等等。如：out表示超过 to outnumber（超过数目）to out-talk（压过别人的声音）；under表示不足、在下 to underdevelop（发育不全）to underestimate（估计不足）to underline（行下划线）等等。
4.叠声合成词
由同一个词重复，或稍加声音变化重叠而成。这类词往往是加重语气因而常带有感情色彩，比方，嘲讽。例：goody-goody（假殷勤）so so（不怎么样）wish wash（乏味的饮料）等等。
5.句式合成词
整个句子当作一个词用，有的已经固定下来，例如pick-me-up（兴奋剂），what's-his-name（某某人）。整个句子用作形容词的现象比较普遍，把复杂的概念揉成单纯的限制语使行文紧凑。A let-bygones-be-bygones manner（一种“过去的就算了吧”的态度） an if-you-would-only-be-guided-by-me expression（一种“要是你肯听了我的话够多好”的神气）
我们接着来学习构词法中的第三类--“缀合法”，分前缀和后缀两部分来讲解。
前缀
有些词根或单词，由于经常放在别的词根或单词前面使用，经过长期的发展，失去了独立的作用，变成前缀。前缀具有一定含义，但不见得很明确。前缀缀在词上，可以改变、限制、或加强这个词的含义，而不改变其词类。一个词根或词，可以层层缀上好几个前缀，如in-com-pre-hen-si-ble-ness(不可理解)的词根是hen,pre-,com-都加强了其含义，而in-又把整个词义转为否定。凡由缀加前缀或后缀而成的词叫做派生词。
前缀的缀合，有时是连写，如extraordinary,有时用连词符号如extra-territorial,有时被词根吸收如ancestor(ante-cessor)。前缀既然有一定的意义，为了便于识别，下面就按照一样相近的前缀，分类说明。（前缀的来源一律以缩写字母注：[OE]古英语；[OF]古法语；[L]拉丁；[GK]希腊；[IT]意大利等）
表示否定的前缀，这类前缀可以分为四种：（1）纯粹表示否定的，如a-,dis-,in-；（2）表示“错误”的，有mis- ；（3）表示“反动作”，如de-,un- ； （4）表示“反对”的，有anti-,contra-
（1）纯粹表示否定的。 a-,an-[GK]能构成少数新词。加在名词、形容词上，表示没有“某种性质“。如:amoral[=unmoral]不道德的,asexual无性别的.a-在元音前变成an-如anonymous[onoma=name]匿名的
dis-[L]加在名词、形容词、动词上，表示否定。Disadvantage(劣势)、disagreement(不和)，disbelieve(不相信)
in-,il-(在字母l前)，im-(在字母m,b,p前)，ir(在字母r前) [L]常和音节较多的learned words(雅语)，尤其是拉丁，法语外来词结合，加在形容词或其派生词、副词上，表示否定。Inaccurate, illegible, impolite, irregular, inability, infinite, impious。
un-[OE]是最通用的前缀之一，可以用于大多数形容词及其派生副词、名词、表示否定，如unfailing,unfinished,undoubtedly,unheard-of等。
（2）表示“错误”的mis- 多作重读，表示“wrongly，badly”。可以适当构造新词：
大多用于动词：to misbehave（行为不当）misunderstand（误解）。
用于作形容词的分词：misbelieving（信仰不当），misleading（靠不住）。
用于动名词：misdealing（不正当手段）。
偶而，mis-也表示纯粹的否定词义：to mistrust。
（3）表示“反动作”。 de- 表示“反动作”（to undo the action）。能构造新词，多作重读。decontrol（取消控制）， decolour（漂白）
dis- 主要用于动词，表示“反动作”。disappear（不见） disarm（解除武装） disconnect（分离）un- 表示“反动作”unmask（揭露） unsay（收回意见）
（4）表示“反对”。 anti- 表示“反对，反面” anti-social（反社会的） antiseptic（防腐剂） anti-militarist（反军国主义者）
contra- 表示“反对，相反” contradiction（矛盾） contrast（对比） contrary（相反的）counter- 表示“against” counteract（还手） counterattack（反攻）
前缀大都表示空间，时间，逻辑上的关系，意思上有引申。
ab- apo- se- 这几个前缀或多或少都有“away ，off”的含义。
ab- a- abs- 在p， m， v之前作a-，在c， t之前作abs-，不能构造新词，表示“away ，apart， absence”，例如absent， avoid
se- 表示“separation”（分离），例如segregate（隔离），sedition（反叛）
ante-，fore- pre- post- pro- 这几个前缀都有“before”的意思。
ante- 表示在...前，例ante-humous（死前），ante-room（前厅）
fore- 表示时间，空间上的“在前面”，例forehead（前额），foregraound（前景），foretell（预言）
pre- 表示事先，在前，例prehistory（史前），prepayment（预支）
post- 表示时间空间上的在后。例posterity（后代），post-war（战后）
pro- 表示“代替，利于，亲于”，例pro-chancellor（代大学校长），pro-consul（代理领事）
circum- peri- 这两个前缀跟圆周有关。
circum- 表示圆周，如circumference， circumlocution， circumpolar
peri- 表示“round”，如perimeter（周长），perisphere（势力范围）
IV. Closing down by summarizing
To end the period let us summarize the making of compound words.
There are three forms of compound words:
1. the closed form, in which the words are melded together, such as firefly, secondhand, softball, childlike, crosstown, redhead, keyboard, makeup, notebook;
1. the hyphenated form, such as daughter-in-law, master-at-arms, over-the-counter, six-pack, six-year-old, mass-produced;
2. and the open form, such as post office, real estate, middle class, full moon, half sister, attorney general.
3． A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(FUTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING)
Aims
To help students read the passage UTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING
To help students to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Read aloud to warm up: Let’s warm up by reading aloud to the recording of the text UTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING
Plane Crazy
Our newest family ride. A circular ride with suspended plane-like pods with rudders for a degree of rider control.
II. Guided reading
1. Reading and translating
Read the text UTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING and translate it into Chinese paragraph by paragraph. Wen Hua, would you have a try?
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read the text and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in it. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from UTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING
Take a journey deep into space, pull…into …, survive an airplane crash, go to the bottom of the ocean, see the sunlight, for a break, take part in car racing, end one’s travel, meet with dinosaur, in one day, use the advanced technology, have experiences, a technology-based theme park, provide up-to-date information, provide hands-on learning,
go to the edges of the solar system, fly through the jungle, do things without danger, try science experiments, prepare for a flight into the space, live on the planet, in the solar system, a combination of fun and learning
3. Doing exercises
Now you are going to do exercises No. 1, 2, 3 and 4 on page 38 and 39 following the article.
III. Guided Writing
You are a guide in a theme park. Write an introduction to the park.
Welcome to Gatorland
Welcome to Gatorland, Orlando's Best Half Day Attraction located in sunny Central Florida! Known internationally as the Alligator Capital of the World, Gatorland is a 110-acre alligator theme park and wildlife preserve, located just minutes away from Sea World, Walt Disney World, Universal Studios, and the Orlando International Airport on US 441 near the Orlando - Kissimmee border. Providing affordable family entertainment since 1949, Gatorland has been a vacation destination for millions of visitors from all over the world with its incredible display of huge alligators and crocodiles, train ride, aviary, breeding marsh and bird sanctuary, petting zoo, nature walk, gift shop, and one-of-a-kind shows such as the world famous Gator Jumparoo. So come inside... your adventure awaits!
IV. Acting
Next we are going to put the text THEME PARKS -FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
A text play of THEME PARKS -FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
(Time: A Sunday morning; Place: A theme park in Beijing; People: a tourist guide, Zhao Yannan and I )
Guide: This morning we are going to visit a theme park in Beijing. Its name is Big World.
I: Where is it? Is it close to Beijing?
Guide: Yes, it is north of Beijing, 30 li away from where we are staying.
Zhao Yannan: Wonderful! I like to amuse myself and escape my busy school life for a while.
I: What can we do there? Can we sit chatting, play games and listen to birds’ singing?
Guide: Yow can do much more than that. You may relax a bit, have picnics and have fun there.
Zhao Yannan: How much does it cost to do visit the park?
Guide: 100 yuan each. It is not expensive at this time of the year.
I: I have never been to a theme park. But I think a theme park provides entertainment. In it visitors may use shuttles to get around, and have a variety of things to see and do.
Zhao Yannan: Does it charge any money for providing food and drink there?
Guide: Yes, of course. It makes a profit by selling souvenirs, too.
I: I have seen it advertised on television. The boss of the park does have some nice ideas. He learned that he built a sports theme park there. Visitors may be involved in physical exercise. They may also buy a brand of sports equipment, go for rides on animals, cook cultural foods, have pictures taken in the sports theme park there.
Zhao Yannan: I hope we shall not be chared for admission into the sports theme park.
Guide: No, you won’t. Everything is covered by the 100 yuan.
I: I guess it is a place of fantasy. Let’s take an active park in everything we do there.
Zhao Yannan: I agree with you. And I hope some day we shall go on trips to space, using computer techniques to guide us in our flying to the other planets.
V. Further applying
Finding information
Go to the library to read or get online to search in order to find more information about theme park in the world. Take notes of your finding and report to your group mates next Saturday morning.
Writing letters
Write a letter to your parents, telling them about your last visit to a park.
VI. Closing down by filling a form
Make use of the text and others to fill in the form.
UTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING
Where is it:
How to get there:
What to do there:
Closing down by planning a theme park
To end this period, I am going to ask you to plan a theme park of your own. Write down your planning and share it with your partner.
Part Two: Teaching Resources (第二部分：教学资源)
1．A text structure analysis of THEME PARKS -FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
I. Type of writing and summary of the idea
Type of writing This is a piece of descriptive writing.
Main idea of the passage
Theme parks are amusing places. Visitors may have fun and more than fun there.
Topic sentence of 1st paragraph Parks provide people with a place to amuse themselves and to escape their busy life for a while.
Topic sentence of 2nd paragraph In recent decades, many parks have been designed to provide entertainment.
Topic sentence of 3rd paragraph Theme parks have a certain idea-a certain theme.
Topic sentence of 4th paragraph There are history and culture theme parks,too.
Topic sentence of 5th paragraph There are also marine and ocean parks.
II. A tree diagram of the text THEME PARKS -FUN AND MORE THAN FUN
III. A retold passage of the text
A possible version:
Theme parks provide visitors with lots of things to amuse themselves. People escape their busy life for a while by going to a theme park. They find interesting things to do in the park.
They may simply sit chatting, playing games, listening to birds’ singing, relaxing a bit, having picnics and having fun there. It costs some money to be there. In recent decades, theme parks are beginning to provide more entertainment. Visitors may use shuttles to get around and have a variety of things to see and do in the park. Theme parks charge money for every activity they provide. They make a big profit by selling souvenirs, too. Sometimes a theme park gets itself advertised on television. A theme park is indeed a place of fantasy.
2．Background information on theme parks
I. Definition of theme park
What is a theme park?
A term used to describe an amusement park that is designed to carry a theme in one or more areas of the park. The theme may carry over to the rides and attractions in that area as well. Examples of theme parks include Holiday World, Islands of Adventure, Disneyland, Magic Kingdom and Knott's Berry Farm.
An amusement park, that has been divided into several sub-sections, each with a distinctive concept, such as the Old West, or the future.
A theme park is a park that uses themeing to take guests to a new world.
An amusement park which has one or more ”themed“ areas, with rides and attractions keyed to the theme of their location within the park. Disneyland, Knotts Berry Farm, and Busch Gardens Williamsburg are examples of theme parks.
an amusement park that is organized around some theme (as the world of tomorrow)
II. Old Aircraft Carrier Turned Into Military Theme Park in China
An old aircraft carrier from the former Soviet Union navy has been turned into a military theme park and will be stationed at Dapeng Bay in Shenzhen, south China' s Guangdong Province.
The 40,000-ton ship, known as the Minsk, first arrived at the Wenchong Shipyard in Guangzhou, capital of Guangdong Province, in November 1998 as scrap iron, the Shanghai-based Wenhuai Daily reported on May 8.
It is about triple the size of a standard football field, 18 stories high, and has more than 2,000 cabins, the paper said.
The carrier, which was poorly maintained by the Russian navy after the collapse of the Soviet Union, retired in 1993 and was initially sold to a South Korean businessman as scrap steel after key military components were removed, the paper said.
The Minsk was later resold to an undisclosed Chinese business. (From: People’s Daily)
III. 12 theme park strategies
Tips to make the most of your vacation
By Terry Riley Travel columnist
How can you get the most from your theme park visit? For an answer, I turned to Robert Obenour. He's spent his career in the theme park business and is currently vice president of operations for Baker Leisure Group, an international theme park consultancy. Here’s the advice he gave me to pass on to you.
1. Plan your visit.
Buy a guidebook. Read reviews. Check out the park’s Web site. Then plan what you want to see and do. Unless the park is small, you shouldn’t expect to see or do everything in one day, so set your priorities. The investment you make in planning will pay handsome dividends on “park day.”
2. Have a “Plan B.”
It is not uncommon that an attraction will be closed. In that case, just move on to the next on your list. Also, in the unlikely - but not unheard of - event that the entire park is closed, have a backup plan that includes another, nearby activity.
3. Arrive early.
An extra 15 minutes waiting in line at the park entrance could cut an hour off of your waiting time for the most popular attractions.
4. Divide and conquer.
Chances are that not everyone in your party wants to do or see the same things. Although it is nice to be able to share the experiences of a theme park as a family or with friends, time (and money) may limit the opportunity for each person to accomplish what he or she would like while traveling as a group.
5. Keep in touch.
Go your separate ways, but arrange to meet back at a specific location at a designated time to talk over your experiences, offer recommendations, revise your plan and set a time and place for your next meeting. Also have a site selected that can become a place to reestablish contact should your party become accidentally separated. It will save lots of time that might otherwise be spent looking for one another.
6. Go deep.
Once you enter the park, proceed to the farthest attractions first. Theme park designers place much of the merchandise near the park entrances - hoping to catch you coming and going. And it works - in this case to your advantage. By bypassing the shops on your way to the popular attractions, you will beat others who get waylaid by the shops.
7. Choose your position.
The front of the line may not always be the best for attractions where large numbers of guests are admitted all at once as, for instance, in an auditorium. The people who are at the very front of the line may find themselves up against a side wall, while middle-of-the-liners have the best view.
8. Leave mid-day.
Generally, theme parks are most crowded in the middle of the day. This is a good time to rest for a few hours - regaining your strength for another assault on the park later in the day. Be sure to get your hand stamped or get some other proof of admission that will allow you to be readmitted to the park at no charge.
9. Eat outside.
Food prices inside a theme park can be as horrifying as any of the park’s dark rides. While taking your mid-day break from the park, refuel yourself without spending a bundle on hot dogs.
10. Return late-day.
As the energy of other guests wanes, move back into the park. This time, visit the attractions closer to the entrance first where it is probably less crowded now.
11. Shop last.
Want to buy souvenirs? Do it on your way out. You won’t have to lug your purchases around with you all day.
12. Enjoy.
Finally, if you find yourself getting ticked off at slow lines, poor service or inconsiderate guests, stop and take a breather. A visit to a theme park is supposed to be an enjoyable event, not a stressful occasion.
3．Words and expressions from Unit 5 Theme Parks
I. Words for Reading (THEME PARKS -FUN AND MORE THAN FUN)
theme n. a favourite theme for poetry, a theme park
amuse v. amuse oneself by …, be amused at [by, with]…
amusement n. find much amusement in…, an amusement park
various a. too various to form a group, various opinions
variety n. for a variety of reasons, have a great variety to choose from, in a variety of
ways
ride n. give sb. a ride, go for a ride, take a long ride
shuttle n. the space shuttle Columbia broke up over Texas, carry shuttle audio during
space shuttle missions.
charge v. charge double for… 对……加倍收费，charge a fee for a service，He is charged
with heavy responsibility.
admission n. Admission by ticket only. Grant sb. admission, gain admission to/ into…
profit ① n. bring a handsome profit to…, divide profits 分红利，increase profits ② v.
make big profits (on sth.), sell sth. at a profit, do sth. for profit
souvenir n. This book ekes out souvenir of my life in the United States. 这本书帮助我追
忆在美国的生活。
involve v. You'd like to meaningfully involve students., the right of Congress to involve the
nation in war
athletic a. an athletic meeting, athletic sports
brand n. Do you like this brand of coffee? a famous brand, the most popular brand on the
market
equipment n. lab equipment, military equipments, the necessary equipments for a trip
sneaker n. wear a new pair of sneakers
minority n. The minority is subordinate to the majority. 少数服从多数
fantasy n. fantasy sports and gaming site, the work of fantasy artist Amy Brown
Fantasyland n. living in a fantasyland, the Guide to Fantasyland
settler n. the early settlers of America, the first white settlers, The settlers were soon acclimated.
marine a. develop a mercantile marine 发展商船
experiment n. attempt the experiment of…, carry out an experiment, make an experiment on sb., prove sth. by experiment
imaginary a. an imaginary enemy, imaginary number 虚数
advanced a. most advanced branches of science and technology, a man advanced in years 老年人
technique n. developed a technique for remotely fingerprinting, a Swimming Technique
Magazine, developing a practical technique for solving voice problems
II. Words for Learning about Language(Word formation)
imagination n. have a good/ poor imagination
test n. provides test preparation services for college admissions, Preparing for a test isn't
easy. do well on the test
vary v. Opinions vary on this point. vary with… 与……一起变化
cloth n. lay the cloth 铺桌布、准备开饭, cut one’s coat according to one’s cloth量布裁衣
，量入为出
III. Words for Using Language (UTUROSCOPE-EXCITEMENT AND LEARNING)
jungle n. Jungle refers usually to a forest. It originated from a Sanskrit word jangala, meaning wilderness. In many languages of the Indian subcontinent, including Indian English it is generally used to refer to any wild, untended or uncultivated land, including forest, scrub, or desert landscapes.
creature n. The term creature refers to an animal.The term can be used to dehumanize a person. For example, in the fictional novel Frankenstein, or The Modern Prometheus by Mary Shelley, Dr. Frankenstein’s hideous construction is often referred to as a ”creature.“ The term literally means ”a created thing,“ and is sometimes used in theology to contrast a created object with a divine Creator under discussion.
volunteer n. a. v. A volunteer is a person who performs or offers to perform a service out of his or her own free will, often without payment. The year 2001 was the International Year of the Volunteer. 2005 is the UK Year of the Volunteer
People may volunteer to perform some work, e.g., of charitable character. Some volunteer for clinical trials or other medical research, and may even donate their bodies to science after their death.
Unit 1 Women of achievement
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
1． A sample lesson plan for reading
(A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE)
Aims
To help students develop their reading ability.
To help students learn about women of achievement.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by describing
Good morning, class. Today we are going to read about A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE. But first, I’d like to know if you have ever heard of women like Elizabeth Fry, Soong Chingling, Jane Goodall, Jody Williams, Joan of Arc and Lin Qiaozhi. Now turn to page 1, look at the photos, read the captions and describe to your neighbor the women in focus. Who is she? What is she? What did she do to benefit the world?
Warming up by discussing
Hi, every one. How did you spend your winter vacation? Did you read any books? Did you read any women of achievement? What makes a woman of achievement? Now in pairs discuss the women on page one. Which of these women do you think is a great woman? Give reasons for your choice.
任长霞：霞蔚长天 警魂不朽
Warming up by reading aloud and translating
Nice to see you back at school, boys and girls. As you have all prepared lessons before class I shall ask six of you at random to read aloud and translate the captions under the photos on page one. Zhao Yanfei, would you try reading aloud and translating the first caption?
（Key: 伊丽莎白弗赖伊是一位教友派信徒。她帮助改善了监禁条件，向囚犯提供工作和教育机会。 她的工作帮助教友派赢得了1947年度的诺贝尔和平奖。）
Well done! Next let’s have Ju Xiaohong do the second one.
II. Pre-reading
1. Looking and saying
Work in pairs. Look at the photos and the title A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE and predict the contents of the text. When you are ready, join another pair and compare your predictions and the clues that helped you to make the predictions.
(Key: From the photos and title I guess that the text tells about a woman scientist who is working in Africa to protect the wildlife there. She studies a family of chimps, delivers a speech on their behaviour, arguing for them to be left in the wild and protected. )
2. Talking and sharing
Work in groups of four. Tell your group mates what you know about wildlife protection. Then the group leader is to stand up and share your group idea with the class.
(Key: I am from Group 3. We think that Jane is a woman of achievement. For she has helped people understand how much chimps behave like humans. Because of her we know that it is better for the animals to be left in the wild or in the special places set up for them. )
樊锦诗：敦煌女儿 守望敦煌
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE. Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence. I will play the tape twice and you shall read aloud twice, too.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE
Use the rules, make a great person, know about…, in pairs, give reasons for…, improve prison conditions, give sb work and education, get the Nobel Peace Prize, one of the top leaders, in modern Chinese history, concern oneself with…, lead China Welfare Institute, study animals, show the connection between… and…, protect chimps, found an international campaign, stop the use of landmines, give sb the Nobel Peace Prize, dress as a man, fight for…, drive…out of…, put sb to death, become a specialist in women’s illnesses, devote all one’s life to…, encourage sb to become doctors, visit the chimps in the forest, behave like humans, watch sb wake up, go back to a place, leave sb sleeping, the night before, wander off into the forest, show love, make …all worthwhile, play in the tree, come into one’s arms, go to sleep in the nest, understand chimp behaviour, spend years observing and recording daily activities, study at a university, be determined to work with animals, in one’s own environment, begin one’s project, change the way, eat meat, as a group, hunt a monkey, communicate with each other, work out…, respect the life of…, leave…in the wild, use… for entertainment or advertisements, set up special places, live safely, crowd in, say…to myself, think about…, in cages, do nothing wrong, achieve everything, gain a doctor’s degree, cheer the achievements of women
3. Reading to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph
Skim the text and identify the topic sentence of each paragraph. You may find it either at the beginning, the middle or the end of the paragraph.
(Key: 1st paragraph: Our group are all going to visit the chimps in the forest. 2nd paragraph: Nobody before has fully understood chimp behaviour. 3rd paragraph: For forty years Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals.)
4. Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table, which list what Jane does to protect African wildlife.
What does Jane do?
Studied these animals for many years
Spent many years observing and recording their daily activities
Discovered that chimps hunt and eat meat
Discovered how chimps communicate with each other
Argued for chimps to be left in the wild
Set up special places
Working with animals in their own environment
5. Reading and understanding difficult sentences
As you have read the text times, you can surely tell which sentences are difficult to understand. Now put your questions concerning the difficult points to me the teacher.
黑猩猩
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises No. 1 and 2.
Closing down by having a discussion
Do you agree with Jane’s ideas? Why or why not?
(Key: I agree with Jane’s idea, because leaving the animals in the wild is the only good way to protect them. The animals belong to the forest, just as we belong to the civilized world. ) What do you think is the best way to protect wildlife?
(Key: I think the best way is to understand and respect the life of animals. Setting up special places where they can live safely is important and effective)
Closing down by retelling the story of Jane Goodall
I shall write some key words and expressions on the board. You are to retell the story of Jane Goodall according to these words.
(Key: visit the chimps, watch the chimps, understand chimp behaviour, argue for…, set up special places)
2．A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(Subject-verb agreement)
Aims
To help students learn about subject-verb agreement.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful structures.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 4 and do exercises No. 1, 2 ,3 and 4 first. Check your answers against your classmates’.
大自然的呼唤
II. Learning about grammar
1. Reading and thinking
Turn to page 2 and read with me the text of A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE. As you read on, pay attention to the forms of sentence predicates and the subject-verb agreement shown in the sentences.
(For reference: Our group are…, Watching a family of chimps is…, Nobody before has fully understood…)
2. Doing exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 5
Turn to page 5. Look at the two sentences: Our group are all going to visit the chimps in the forest. And Our group includes six boys and five girls. Have you noticed any difference between them? Yes. If the word “group ” refers to different members, use a plural verb. If the word “group” is considered as a whole, use a singular verb. Now fill in the blanks with the proper form of the given verbs in brackets on page 5. And then go on to do Exercise No. 2 on the same page, that is, fill in the correct verb form in the letter.
III. Ready used materials for Subject-verb agreement
I got a hold of some bad pork chops the other day, and they didn't agree with me. Stomach aches aren't very pleasant. Don't you agree?
We all know these meanings of ”agree,“ but when we talk about subject-verb agreement, we're talking about something different: matching subjects and verbs according to number. That is, when you have a singular subject, you have to match it with a singular verb form: The boy plays. When you have a plural subject, you must have a plural verb form: The boys play.
In short, simple sentences, you should have no problem with agreement. You can hear the problem: The boys plays. When it's wrong , it just sounds funny. However, there are four potential problem spots that you need to watch carefully:
o stuff in between the subject and verb
o reversed sentence order
o ”-body,“ ”-one,“ and ”-thing“ words
o ”who,“ ”which,“ and ”that“
Stuff in between subjects and verbs
The stuff here is usually a prepositional phrase that separates the subject from the verb. Remember how we crossed out prepositional phrases in order to find the subject? Do the same thing if you're having problems with agreement. Now, thinking about that, look at the following sentence and decide what's wrong with it:
The dishes in the kitchen is dirty.
Good guess! The subject and the verb don't agree. What's the probable cause for the problem? Kitchen (a singular noun) is right in front of is (a singular verb). If kitchen were the subject, that would be okay. But, it's not. Cross out the prepositional phrase and you're left with:
The dishes in the kitchen is dirty.
”The dishes . . . is dirty?“ Sounds wrong, doesn't it? The subject is plural, but the verb is singular. They don't agree. The correct version is:
The dishes in the kitchen are dirty.
Once you know how to look for this problem, it shouldn't be too hard to get rid of it when you proofread your paper.
Reversed sentence order
The normal pattern for English sentences is subject-verb. However, there are a few situations where this order is reversed (like this sentence):
o There are snacks on the laundry-room table.
o Where are they?
o On the table are the goodies!
See how the subject comes after the verb in each of these? If you can remember how to locate subjects and verbs, you shouldn't blunder into mistakes when writing reversed-order sentences.
”-body,“ ”-one,“ and ”-thing“ words
The correct term for these words is indefinite pronouns, but if you remember them as ”-body,“ ”-one,“ and ”-thing“ words, you'll probably be able to spot them more easily. You only need to know one thing: if a word has one of these endings (like everybody, everyone, anyone, anything, etc.), it is always singular! You can also include each, either, and neither in this group. Look at the following:
1. Everyone is going on a picnic.
2. Each of the boys is taking his own lunch.
3. If anyone drops something to eat, I'll grab it before he can pick it up.
You shouldn't have problems with these if you simply memorize the endings of words that are always singular.
NOTE: We said that either and neither are always singular; however, if you have two subjects in an either . . . or or neither . . . nor construction, getting the agreement right may give you fits. To get it right, just locate the subject closest to the verb and make the verb agree with it:
o Either the mailman or the construction workers are causing Peggy to bark like crazy.
o Neither the dogs down the street nor the one next door pays any attention.
Compare this with the following:
o Either the construction workers or the mailman is causing Peggy to bark like crazy.
o Neither the one next door nor the dogs down the street pay any attention.
Agreement, in this case, depends on the placement of the subject.
”Who,“ ”which,“ and ”that“
Remember dependent clauses? They have a subject and a verb, but they can't stand alone. That's what we're dealing with here, but with a little something extra. Now we've got to consider pronouns. A pronoun is a word that takes the place of a noun that comes before it, usually in the same clause or one very close to it.
Peggy is a troublemaker. She bites my ears and steals my food.
”Who,“ ”which,“ and ”that“ are pronouns. When they take the place of a singular noun, they are singular; when they take the place of a plural noun, they are plural. This is important to remember when they are the subject of a clause. Compare the following sentences:
1. Big Dog is one of those animals who are very intelligent.
2. Big Dog is an animal who is very intelligent.
In both, who is the subject of a dependent clause. In number 1, it takes the place of animals (a plural form). That's why ”are“ is the correct verb choice. In number 2, who takes the place of animal (a singular form), and that's why ”is“ is correct.
This may seem a bit confusing at first, but there's a way to get it right every time. If you find ”who,“ ”which,“ or ”that“ introducing a dependent clause (like in the examples above):
1. Look at the word right in front of it (usually that's the word it takes the place of).
2. Decide if the word is singular or plural (that will tell you whether ”who,“ ”which,“ or ”that“ is singular or plural).
3. Make the verb agree!
That's all there is to it!
IV. Closing down by doing a quiz
To end the period you are going to take a quiz on subject-verb agreement.
Quiz on Subject-Verb Agreement
Select one answer from the choices provided after each sentence. The word you choose should fit the blank in the sentence. Don't use the HINT buttons unless you really need them.
1. Either the physicians in this hospital or the chief administrator ____ going to have to
make a decision. (is, are)
2. ______ my boss or my sisters in the union going to win this grievance? (Is, Are)
3. Some of the votes __________ to have been miscounted. ( seems,seem)
4. The tornadoes that tear through this county every spring _____ more than just a
nuisance. (is, are)
5. Everyone selected to serve on this jury _____ to be willing to give up a lot of time.
(has, have)
6. Kara Wolters, together with her teammates, _________ a formidable opponent on the
basketball court. (presents, present)
7. He seems to forget that there __________ things to be done before he can graduate.
(are, is)
8. There _______ to be some people left in that town after yesterday's flood. (have, has)
9. Some of the grain __________ to be contaminated. (appear, appears)
10. Three-quarters of the students __________ against the tuition hike. (is, are)
11. Three-quarters of the student body __________ against the tuition hike. (is, are)
12. A high percentage of the population _________ voting for the new school. (is, are)
13. A high percentage of the people _________ voting for the new school. (was, were)
3． A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME)
Aims
To help students read the passage A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME.
To help students to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Read aloud to warm up: Let’s warm up by reading aloud to the recording of the text A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME.
林巧稚----- 中国医学圣母
II. Guided reading
1. Reading and translating
Read the text A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME and translate it into Chinese paragraph by paragraph. Li Wenqin. You are to do paragraph 1, please. ….
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME
sit down at the computer, do some research on…, enjoy English, choose…to study at university, show information on the screen, be busy in one’s career, travel abroad to study, catch the eyes, cut the death rate, have and care for a baby, follow rules, keep… clean and healthy, need the advice, be intended for…, live in the countryside, reach a doctor, become a specialist in women’s diseases, get a medical training, place women’s education second to men’s, make…famous, show kindness and consideration to…, be tired after a day’s work, late at night, deliver a baby, find out more about…, choose not to do sth, have a family of one’s own, make sure that…, carry on the work, fill in the forms for the university entrance exam
3. Doing exercises
Now you are going to do exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 6 following the article.
4. Listening
For listening turn to page 7 and be ready to do exercises No. 1, 2 and 3.
5. Acting
Next we are going to put the text A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME ON STAGE. Now Zhu Qing and Zhang Qiang, plesase!
A text play of A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME
(Time: Sunday evening; Place: at home; People: Mom and I )
I: Mom, do you know anything about Lin Qiaozhi?
Mom: No, but you may turn on the computer and get online to do some research on her.
I: All right, thanks. Look, I get her. It seemed that Lin Qiaozhi had been very busy traveling abroad, studying and writing books and articles.
Mom: What books did she write?
I: It is a small book on how to cut the death rate from having and caring babies by following some simple rules.
Mom: What are the rules? Tell me more about them.
I: They are simply rules for keeping babies clean and healthy.
Mom: Why did she write that? Who are the women that she thought needed that advice?
I: Let me see. Mom, I think it is intended for women living in the countryside. Perhaps they could not reach a doctor.
Mom: When did she live? I mean Lin Qiaozhi.
I: Here it is. She lived in the early 20th century.
Mom: Oh, that’s before the liberation and the founding of New China. It’s a long time ago. It must have been very difficult for her to get a medical training.
I: Why is that, Mom?
Mom: Because women’s education was always placed second to men’s. I am sure it was hard work and determination as well as her good nature that got her into medical school.
I: Mom, you are right. She is great for her kindness and consideration shown to all her patients.
Mom: So what about you, son? Have you made up your mind as to what to study at college?
I: Sure, mom. I will go to a medical university, to be a doctor as great as she is.
Mom: I am confident that you will be as good a doctor as her. Go and fill in the forms for the university entrance exam…
III. Guided writing
1. Writing an imagined dialogue
Groups 1 and 2 are going to write an imagined dialogue between Lin Qiaozhi and you. You may begin like this: Hello, doctor. I need your help. …
2. Writing a description
Turn to page 8 and follow the direction to write a description of a woman’s character. You may use the information, structures and expressions from the unit.
DESCRIBE A FAMOUS PERSON YOU ADMIRE
Mother Teresa is a great woman though she has died. She spent her whole life helping the poorest of the poor. Today, she is renowned and respected around the world.
Mother Teresa was born on 26th august 1910 and named Christened Agnes Bojaxhiu. She grew up in the Serbian town of Skopje, which was a poor country at that time. Her whole family was Christians. When she was twelve years old, she expressed her wish to become a nun. As she wanted to be sure on her wish, she spent six years pondering about this decision. At last, she made up her mind and worked as a nun to help the poorest people in India.
After becoming sister Teresa, she said that she received a message from god that god wanted her to go to the slums to live with the poor. Her worked started. She founded a new congregation called the missionaries of Christianity in Calcutta. It helped the poor, the sick, orphans, alcoholics, drug addicts and even the aids patients. Mother Teresa was not afraid of infection. She looked after the patients herself and loved them. She never stopped taking care if them and never considered giving up anyone of them.
Her work was made known to the world. Some people supported her but some didn’t. She didn’t care. She continued her work and setup other missionaries around the world. She gave love to all the poor in other parts of the world, not only in India. Although she was seriously ill, she never ceased to help the poor. Her work was recognized by the world when she was awarded the Nobel Prize in peace in 1997. She contributed the money she received to the missionary of charity.
Mother Teresa died of cardiac arrest on 5th September 1997 in the missionaries’ Calcutta headquarters. Million of people over the world mourned over the loss of this remarkable woman who was a shining example of goodness and love all her life. I regard her as a role model. I wish I could contribute myself for the good of the world like she did.
III. Further applying
Finding information
Go to the library to read or get online to search in order to find more information on wildlife protection. Take notes of your finding and report to your group mates next Monday morning.
Writing letters
Write a letter either to Jane Goodall or Lin Qiaozhi, telling her about your life and hope.
Acting a text play
Turn the article A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME into a text play. Choose your part and rehearse for the School Art Festival next month.
IV. Closing down
Closing down by filling a form
Make use of the text and others to fill in form.
Lin Qiaozhi’s life history
time place event
Closing down by describing a person
To end this period, I am going to have two of you stand up to describe to the class a person whom he admires. Who likes to speak first?
Part Two: Teaching Resources (第二部分：教学资源)
1．A text structure analysis of A PROTECTOR OF AFRICAN WILDLIFE
I. Type of writing and summary of the idea
Type of writing This is a piece of narrative writing.
Main idea of the passage
Being a protector of African wildlife Jane Goodall works to understand chimps and protect them.
Topic sentence of 1st paragraph Our group are all going to visit the chimps in the forest.
Topic sentence of 2nd paragraph Jane spent many years observing and recording their daily activities.
Topic sentence of 3rd paragraph For forty years Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals.
NATURE IN OUR HANDS
II. A tree diagram
III. A retold passage of the text
A possible version:
We set out at 5:45 am to visit the chimps in Gombe national Park. We watched a family of chimps wake up in the morning and followed them wandering into the forest. Jane had been there observing and recording chimps’ daily activities. For 40 years, she had been helping the world to understand and respect the life of these animals. Jane is indeed a woman of achievement and a good example for us all.
2．Background information on Women of achievement
I. What are Women of Achievement? 何谓成功女性
A Woman of Achievement is a dedicated leader who has earned admiration and respect; has vision and brings others towards it by her example; faces life’s challenges with grace and courage; lives with dignity, integrity and honor.
II. The Wildlife Conservation Society 野生动物保护协会
The Wildlife Conservation Society saves wildlife and wild lands through careful science, international conservation, education, and the management of the world’s largest system of urban wildlife parks. These activities change attitudes toward nature and help people imagine wildlife and humans living in sustainable interaction on both a local and a global scale. WCS is committed to this work because we believe it essential to the integrity of life on Earth.
III. China Marks 100th Birthday of Chinese Gynecological Pioneer 中国纪念妇科先驱百年诞辰
Many well-known doctors, senior legislators and public health officials gathered in Beijing on Friday to mark the 100th birthday of the late Professor Lin Qiaozhi, a pioneer in gynaecology in China and a well-respected doctor.
In over sixty years of medical service as a gynecologist and an obstetrician, Professor Lin, also known as Lim Kha T'i, delivered more than 50,000 babies.
Professor Lin, who died in 1983 at the age of 82, was well respected in China for her exceptional medical skills and her excellent medical ethics.
Top Chinese legislator Li Peng has written an inscription in honor of Lin which reads: ”Cherishing Forever the Memory of Outstanding Medical Scientist, Professor Lin Qiaozhi“.
At a gathering Friday at the Great Hall of the People, Wang Guangying, a senior legislator, and Qian Zhengying, senior leader in China's top national advisory body, unveiled a copper statue in honor of Professor Lin.
In addition, a gynecological and obstetrical institute named after Lin Qiaozhi was unveiled Friday at the Chinese Academy of Medical Sciences.
Lin made a great contribution to popular science and to maternal and child health care. She was made a posthumous member of the Chinese Academy of Sciences in 1995.
Lin, a native of Xiamen, Fujian Province, graduated from Peking Union Medical College in 1929 and underwent post-graduate studies at Manchester and London Universities in Britain between 1932 and 1933, and Chicago University in the United States between 1939 and 1940.
IV. China Wildlife Conservation Association 中国野生动物保护协会
Founded in Beijing in December 1983, the China Wildlife Conservation Association (CWCA) now has 31 provincial-level and 260 prefecture/county-level branches, and about 30 thousand members who are wildlife conservationists, administrators, scientists, educators, natural reserve works and wildlife lovers. CWCA’s mission is to promote the development of Chinese wildlife conservation, protect, develop wildlife resources and rescue endangered species.
CWCA's responsibility is to organize its members in carrying out conservation laws and policies, running education and popularization programs of wildlife protection and rescue, conducting scientific research and academic exchange, providing technical consultation on wildlife resources management, raising funds for wildlife conservation and establishing contact with foreign groups and participating in international cooperation.
Since its foundation, the CWCA has run various programs to promote education, propaganda, and fund-raising. For example, ”Bird-loving week“, wetland conservation, and specialized training, It holds meetings and activities such as the international conference on wildlife conservation in China'87. It has also conducted joint research programs with wildlife conservation organization in the US, Germany, and other countries and regions. In 1984, CWCA become a member of the IUCN(the world conservation union). In order to promote
international exchange, CWCA has arranged for exhibits in the US, Canada, Ireland, Belgium, and Singapore and other countries of rare Chinese animals, including the giant panda and golden monkey. CWCA is willing to cooperate with countries and international wildlife conservation organizations who concern about Chinese wildlife conservation in technical communication.
3．Words and expressions from Unit 1 Women of achievement
I. Words for Reading
achieve v: 完成achieve one’s goal/ achieve success/ achieve one’s purpose/ achieve a victory/ achieve fame
achievement n.: 成就the achievement of one’s goal/ the achievement of peace/ a scientific achievement
condition n. 条件 in good condition/ under difficult conditions/ meet conditions/ without condition
welfare n. 福利student welfare/ promote the public welfare/ be concerned about sb.’s welfare
institute n. 学院establish an institute/ an institute of technology
connection连接 break off a connection/ have business connection with…/ enter into a connection with…
campaign n.运动 begin a campaign against…/ plan a campaign/ during a campaign for re-election
organization n. 组织 build up a social organization/ dissolve an organization/ join an organization
specialist n.专家 consult a specialist/ an eye specialist/ a specialist in heart diseases
devote v. 献身 devote oneself to…/ devote one’s time to…/ devote one’s money to …
behave v. 举动 behave badly to one’s wife/ behave oneself well/ behave as a gentleman
behaviour n. 行为 report one’s behaviour/ understand one’s behaviour/ admire sb for his behaviour
worthwhile a. 值得做的 a worthwhile job/ a worthwhile book/ a worthwhile task
nest n. 巢穴 make a nest/ build a nest/ take a nest (掏鸟窝)
observe v. 观察, 遵守 observe sb. closely/ carefully observe sth. / strictly observe the school discipline
observation n. 观察 carry out observations/ come under observation/ keep observation upon…
respect v. 尊重 respect our teacher/ respect the rights of other people
argue v. 争论 argue that/ argue him into staying here/ argue her out of climbing the mountain
entertainment n. 娱乐give an entertainment to sb./ play the piano for one’s entertainment
inspire v. 鼓舞 inspire sb. with courage/ inspire sb. to further efforts
support v. 支持 support sb. financially/ support sb. against…/ support one’s family on one’s wages
II. Words for Learning about Language
communication n. 通讯，交际 cut off communications with…/ have no communication with…/
specialize v. 专攻， 使专门化 specialize in…/ be highly specialized
strike v. 打击 n. 罢工 strike sb. on the head/ strike one’s head against the wall
career n. 事业 take up medicine as one’s career/ have a bright career before sb.
III. Words for Using Language
article n. 文章 write an article on education for a newspaper
explain v. 解释 explain the meaning of the sentence/ explain to sb. that
rate n. 比率，速度 The birth rate has dropped. at the rate of 3 to 5/ raise [reduce] hotel rates
巴西姑娘加冕“地球小姐”
care for v. 照顾 care for my health/ care little for money/ be well cared for
medical a. 医学的 need a medical checkup/ go to a medical college/ be under medical treatmment
determination n. 决心，果断 show fixed determination/ make a fresh determination
kindness n. 仁慈，好意 do sb. a kindness/ help sb. out of kindness/ treat sb. with kindness
consideration n. 考虑，体谅 after much consideration/ give careful consideration to…
deliver v. 递送，（生孩子），发表（演说）deliver the mail/ deliver a long speech/ deliver a baby safely
personality n. 个性，人格 have a strong personality/ respect the personality of a person
modest a. 谦虚的，适度的be modest about one’s achievement/ a modest price
considerate a. 考虑周到的 be considerate of [to, toward] old people
Unit 4 Body Language
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
1． A sample lesson plan for reading
(COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?)
Aims
To help students develop their reading ability.
To help students learn about body language.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by acting
Look at the list of interpretation on the right side of the chart. Perform the action or the nonverbal behaviour on the left side.
Examples Of Body Language
NONVERBAL BEHAVIOR INTERPRETATION
Brisk, erect walk Confidence
Standing with hands on hips Readiness, aggression
Sitting with legs crossed, foot kicking slightly Boredom
Sitting, legs apart Open, relaxed
Arms crossed on chest Defensiveness
Walking with hands in pockets, shoulders hunched Dejection
Hand to cheek Evaluation, thinking
Touching, slightly rubbing nose Rejection, doubt, lying
Rubbing the eye Doubt, disbelief
Hands clasped behind back Anger, frustration, apprehension
Locked ankles Apprehension
Head resting in hand, eyes downcast Boredom
Rubbing hands Anticipation
Sitting with hands clasped behind head, legs crossed Confidence, superiority
Open palm Sincerity, openness, innocence
Pinching bridge of nose, eyes closed Negative evaluation
Tapping or drumming fingers Impatience
Steepling fingers Authoritative
Patting/fondling hair Lack of self-confidence; insecurity
Tilted head Interest
Stroking chin Trying to make a decision
Looking down, face turned away Disbelief
Biting nails Insecurity, nervousness
Pulling or tugging at ear Indecision
Warming up by defining-What is body language?
● The gestures, poses, movements, and expressions that a person uses to communicate.
●The outward signs of a person which indicates their inner thoughts or attitude. For example, a bowed head indicates submission, a hand over the mouth indicates the person doesn't want to talk or feels their words aren't worth listening to. Scratching indicates nervousness. A person passing another on the street might bow their head as a subconscious sign of submission.
● Conscious or unconscious bodily movements and gestures that communicate to others a person's attitudes and feelings. This may also include dress, facial features, skin colour or other personal means of communication without words.
● communication via the movements or attitudes of the body
● Body language is a broad term for several forms of communication using body movements or gestures, instead of, or as a complement to, sounds, verbal language, or other forms of communication. In turn, it is one category of paralanguage, which describes all forms of human communication that are not language.
II. Pre-reading
1. Looking and saying
Look at the man in the picture below. What does he say to you by his body language?
Basically, how the ...... do I know? Or, I don’t know nothin! The shoulders are hunched and the hands are open signifying a big question mark.
2. Talking and sharing
Body language is the quiet, secret and most powerful language of all!
According to experts, our non-verbal language communicates about 50% of what we really mean (voice tonality contributes 38%) while words themselves contribute a mere 7%.
Our bodies send out messages constantly and often we don't recognize that we're communicating a lot more than we realize.
Our understanding and use of non-verbal cues in facial expression are familiar to us nearly from birth
III. Reading
1. Reading aloud to the recording
Now please listen and read aloud to the recording of the text COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?. Pay attention to the pronunciation of each word and the pauses within each sentence. I will play the tape twice and you shall read aloud twice, too.
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?
Send… to do sth., meet … at the airport, meet with…, at a hotel, represent the Chinese government, look around, in a curious way, be followed by…, introduce…to…, kiss… on the cheek, step back, appear surprised, take a few steps away from…, coming in, at the same time, reach one’s hand out to …, touch sb’s hand, greet each other, communicate with spoken language, express one’s feelings, use unspoken language, keep physical distance, stand close to…, approach… closely, shake hands, move close to…, move back a bit, nod at …, stand close to…, behave the same way, avoid difficulty
3. Reading to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph
Next you are to skim the text to identify the topic sentence of each paragraph.
4. Reading and transferring information
Read the text again to complete the table. Where is he/ she from? What does he/ she do when he/ she meet someone at the airport for the first time?
Name Country Action Meaning
Mr Garcia
Julia Smith
Ahmed Aziz
Madame Coulon
5. Reading and understanding difficult sentences
As you have read the text times, you can surely tell which sentences are difficult to understand. Now put your questions concerning the difficult points to me the teacher.
6. Reading and translating
Now it’s time to translate the text into Chinese, sentence by sentence. Who will be the first to do it?
IV. Closing down
Closing down by doing exercises
To end the lesson you are to do the comprehending exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 26 and 27.
Closing down by checking
Check some of the following basic non-verbal cues and you'll recognize that you already speak and translate much of the language.
“I’m surprised!”
“I’m shocked!”
“I’m sad!”
2．A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial)
Aims
To help students learn about The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful words and expressions.
To help students discover and learn to use some useful structures.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Warming up by discovering useful words and expressions
Turn to page 27 and do exercises No. 1, 2 ,3 and 4 first. Check your answers against your classmates’.
II. Learning about grammar
1. Reading and thinking
Turn to page 25 and read with me the text of COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM? As you read along, pay attention to the uses of The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial.
(They are visitors coming from several countries. 作定语；Four people enter looking around in a curious way. 作状语； This is an exciting experience for you. 作定语; You stand watching and listening. 作状语；……)
2. Doing exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 29
Turn to page 29. Do exercises No. 1 and 2。
III. Ready used materials for The ~ing form as the Attribute & Adverbial
... When we use a verb in -ing form more like a verb or an adjective, it is usually a present participle:. Anthony is fishing. I have a boring teacher. In this lesson, we will look at the use of verbs in the ~ing form ...
The ~ing form 作定语
现在分词可以单独作定语，也可以构成合成词作定语，但在更多的情况下是分词短语作定语，包括限定性和非限定性（用逗号与其他部分分开），在意义上相当于一个定语从句。现在分词作定语通常带有主动意义和未完成意义。例如：
The man following was obviously in a hurry。（现在分词单独作定语）
They acted just like a conquering army。（现在分词单独作定语）
Do you know the man standing over there by the motor car?（分词短语作限定性定语。）
Last night,we caught a thief stealing John's bike.（分词短语作限定性定语）
The name Nebraske comes from the Oto Indian word “ebrathka”.meaning flat water.（分词短语作非限定性定语）
The ~ing form 作状语
现在分词作状语表示主语在进行一动作的同时所进行的另一动作，它对谓语动词起修饰或陪衬的作用。这时要注意现在分词与其逻辑主语在时态和意义上的统一。例如：
Rushing out of the room, he has knocked down by a car.（作时间状语）
=When he rushed out of the room, he was hnocked down by a car.
Working harder, you will pass the entrance exam.（作条件状语）
=If you work harder, you will pass the entrance exam.
She sat at a window and read a book.（作伴随状语）
=She sat at a window and read a book.
Having won the championship, he was awarded a million dollars.（作原因状语）
=Because he had won the championship, he was awarded a million dollars.
Even if taking a taxi, I will still be late for the meeting.（作让步状语）
=Even if I take a taxi, I will still be late for the meeting.
The road is under construction, thus causing the delay.（作结果状语）
=The road is under construction, and thus caused the delay.
注意，当现在分词作让步状语时，一般放在句首，常常由although, though, even if ,unless等连词引入；作结果状语时，一般放在句末，前面可so, thus, henc。
IV. Closing down by doing a quiz
To end the period you are going to take a quiz on ~ing words.
~ING WORDS
Highlight all the words ending in '-ing'.
Make lists of all the different categories of '-ing' words; that is, their different functions in the sentence.
Examples of some of the different categories
He's swimming.
He's wearing a swimming suit.
He likes swimming.
Swimming is pleasant.
Rewrite each sentence without using the '-ing' form.
Is there a change in meaning? What is it?
Find sentences in the text which can be rewritten using an -ing form.
Is there any change in meaning? What is it?
3． A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(SHOWING OUR FEELINGS)
Aims
To help students read the passage SHOWING OUR FEELINGS.
To help students to use the language by reading, listening, speaking and writing.
Procedures
I. Warming up
Read aloud to warm up: Let’s warm up by reading aloud to the recording of the text SHOWING OUR FEELINGS.
II. Guided reading
1. Reading and translating
Read the text SHOWING OUR FEELINGS and translate it into Chinese paragraph by paragraph. He Jing. You are to do paragraph 1, please. ….
2. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Copy them to your notebook after class as homework.
Collocations from SHOWING OUR FEELINGS
Show all kinds of feeling, turn one’s back to…, show anger, close one’s hand, shake… at…, a universal facial expression, put…at ease, hide feelings, lose face, nod the head up and down, look away from…, hold one’s arms across one’s chest, protest…from …, turn toward…, roll one’s eyes, show respect for…, use gestures, give a hug to sb., stand close to…, with…open, look directly at…, look sb. in the eye, tell the truth, be wrong about…
3. Doing exercises
Now you are going to do exercises No. 1 and 2 on page 30 following the article.
The importance of body language
People can not live without each other, we are social beings. As soon as we are in contact with others we are communicating. For this we can make use of spoken and written language. In these ways we make the content of a message clear to each other. However we can also communicate without words. This kind of communication tells us something about the relationship between people. Often this is more important than getting the content of the message across. The communication about this non spoken communication, which tells us something about the relationship between people, is called Meta-Communication. Communicating about communication!
4. Writing
Turn to page 31. Make a list of three positive body language expressions and three negative body language expressions.
Non-verbal communication, or body language
o Refers to messaging without words
In a personal spoken message
o According to Albert Mehrabian, in Psychology Today (1968), of the total message
7% is conveyed by the words
38% by the vocal tones, and
55% by facial and body expression
o Reading body language is an important skill
5. Listening, writing
Turn to page 31 and do the listening and writing exercises No. 1 and 2.
Positive gesture clusters - 1
●Acceptance
o Hand to chest
o Open arms and hands
o Touching gestures
o Moving closer, one to another
o Preening
o Sitting on one leg (for female)
Positive gesture clusters - 2
●Confidence
o Steepling (fingers touching like a church steeple)
o Hands behind back, authority position
o Back stiffened
o Hands in coat pockets with thumbs out
o Hands on lapels of coat
●Expectancy
o Rubbing palms
o Jingling money openly
o Crossed fingers
o Moving closer
Positive gesture clusters - 3
●Cooperation, readiness, openness
o Open hands
o Hands on hips
o Hands on mid-thigh while seated
o Sitting on edge of chair
o Arms spread, gripping edge of table or desk
o Moving closer
o Sprinter's position
o Hand-to-face gestures
Positive gesture clusters - 4
●Evaluation
o Hand-to-face gestures
o Head tilted
o Stroking chin
o Peering over glasses
o Taking glasses off, and cleaning
o Putting eye glass ear piece in mouth
o Pipe smoker gestures
o Getting up from table and walking around
o Putting hand to bridge of nose
Positive gesture clusters - 5
●Reassurance
o Touching
o Pinching flesh
o Chewing pen or pencil
o Rubbing over thumb
o Touching back of chair on entering room
o Biting finger nails
o Hands in pockets
Positive gesture clusters - 6
●Self-control
o Holding arm behind back
o Gripping wrist
o Locked ankles
Clenched hands
6. Speaking and writing
Discuss Lin Pei’s behaviour with your partner. Then write some advice for Lin Pei.
Part Two: Teaching Resources (第二部分：教学资源)
1．A text structure analysis of COMMUNICATION: NO PROBLEM?
I. Type of writing and summary of the idea
COMMUNICAATION: NO PROBLEM?
Type of writing This is a piece of descriptive writing.
Main idea of the passage
By familiarizing ourselves with a few basic nonverbal signals, we can improve our ability to understand what people are really communicating and become aware of what we are broadcasting to the world with our own non-verbal cues.
Idea of 1st paragraph You were sent to meet business people from several countries at Pudong Airport.
Idea of 2nd paragraph Examples of greeting by Mr Garcia from Columbia, by Julia Smith from Britain, by the visitor from Japan, by George Cook from Canada
Idea of 3rd paragraph People communicate by unspoken language, learned or cultural “body language”.
Idea of 4th paragraph Greeting by English people, by people from Spain, Italy, South American and Japan.
Idea of 5th paragraph Examples of greeting by Ahmed Aziz from Jordan, by Madame Coulon from France, by people from Middle East or some Muslim countries.
Idea of 6th paragraph Body language is either good or bad.
II. A tree diagram of COMMUNICAATION: NO PROBLEM?
III. A retold passage of the text
A possible version:
You were sent to meet business people from several countries at Pudong Airport.
At the airport Mr Garcia from Columbia approaches Julia Smith from Britain, touching her shoulder and kissing her on the cheek, who steps away from him. Mr Cook, from Canada, reaches out his hand to the visitor from Japan who bows.
People communicate differently by unspoken language, their learned or cultural “body language”.
English people usually do not stand close to others or touch strangers when they first meet. But people from Spain, Italy, South American countries approach others closely, even touch them. Most world people greet each other by shaking hands while Japanese people do so by bowing.
People from Jordan moves close to the one they greet. People from France may greet each other by shaking hands and kissing. Men from Middle East or some Muslim countries stand quite close to other men to talk and they will not shake hands with women.
Body language is either good or bad. Its understanding helps you better communicate with each other.
2．Background information on Body language
I. American Gestures
COMMON GESTURES
1. Americans are a not touch (touch/not touch)oriented.
2. In normal social situations, Americans generally stand about 30 inches apart from one another, which is also considered their personal ”comfort zone.“
3. At sporting events or the theater, Americans usually slide into a crowded aisle while facing forward (forward/the people).
Gesture Meaning
Americans shake hands, and from an early age they are taught to do so with a firm., solid grip. When greeting one another.
American children are taught to look others directly in the eyes. When greeting and conversing. If not, means shyness or weakness.
Arm raised and the open hand ”waggles“ back and forth. Signaling ”hello“ or ”good-bye.“ Or trying to get someone's attention.
Americans will often wave to another person and then turn to make hand scoop inward; or raise the index finger ) palm toward one's face, and make a ”curling “ motion with that finger. To beckon or summon another person.
Palm facing out with the index and middle fingers displayed in the shape of a ”V.“ ”Victory“ or ”peace.“
Thumb and forefinger form a circle with the other three fingers splayed upward; it is used frequently and enthusiastically. ”O.K.“ meaning ”fine“ or ”yes.“
Thumb up with a close fist. Meaning support or approval, ”O.K.“ or ”Good Going!“ or ”Good job!“
Fist raised with index finger and little finger extended. Texas rallying call ”hook 'em horns.“ Baseball meaning ”two outs.“
Whistling Pretty woman, cheering at sporting events, applauding performances.
Nodding and shaking the head. Yes and No
Extend the forefinger and make a circular motion near the temple or ear. Something or someone is ”crazy.“
II.Common Asian Gestures
1. GREETINGS GESTURES
a) Handshaking
b) Bowing
c) Avoid direct eye contact
2. BEKONING GESTURES
a) To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion.
b) Avoid using fingers in pointing to an object.
3. TOUCHING GESTURES
a) Not touch oriented societies
b) Avoid public display of affection
c) Pushing (bumping) in crowds
4. OTHER NON VERBAL GESTURES
a) Respect to elderly people
b) Smiling often can cover a gamut of emotions: happiness, anger, confusion, apologies , or sadness.
c) Displaying an open mouth (such as yawning or a wide-open laugh) is considered rude, especially with women who cover their mouths when giggling or laughing.
d) Try to maintain a balanced posture, stand or sit erectly or squarely. Don't slouch or put on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrest. Crossing the legs at the knees or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
e) Silience (listening) is a sign of politeness and of contemplation. During conversations, be especially careful about interrupting.
Japan
In summary, for most visitors the Japanese are complex and difficult to understand. Remember two things: (1) style, or the way things are done, is just as important as substance, or what is being done; and (2) watch your Japanese hosts carefully and follow their example.
5. GREETING GESTURES
a) The graceful act of bowing is the traditional greeting.
b) However, they have also adopted the western custom of shaking hands, albeit with a light grip and perhaps with eyes averted. Meanwhile, to show respect for their customs, it would flatter them to offer a slight bow when being introduced.
c) Avoid hugging and kissing when greeting.
d) It is considered rude to stare. Prolonged direct eye contact is considered impolite or even intimidating.
e) It is considered rude to stand with your hand or hands in your pockets, especially when greeting someone or when addressing a group of people.
f) The seemingly simple act of exchanging business cards is more complex in japn becuae the business card represents not only one's identity but one's station in life. Yours should be printed in your own language and in Japanese.
6. TOUCHING GESTURES
a) The Japanese are not a touch-oriented society, so avoid open displays of affection, touching or any prolonged form of body contact.
b) Queues are generally respected; it is only in crowded train and subway stations where the huge volume of people causes touching and pushing.
7. BECKONING GESTURES
a) It is considered insulting to point to someone fingers extended and the thinb folded into the palm.
b) To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion.
8. OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
a) Because of the high regard for graciousness and restraint, one should not shout, raise the voice in anger, or exhibit any excessively demonstrative behavior.
b) Among the Japanese, smiling often can cover a gamut of emotions: happiness, anger, confusion, apologies, or sadness.
c) Displaying an open mouth (such as yawning or a wide open laugh) is considered rude in Japan, especially with women who cover their mouths when giggling or laughing.
d) Try to maintain a balanced posture stand or sit erectly or squarely. Do not slouch or put your feet on desks or chairs. When seated have both feet squarely on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrests. Crossing the legs at the knee or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
e) Silence is perfectly acceptable and customary. Silence (listening) is a sign of politeness and of contemplation. During conversations, be especially careful about interrupting.
f) One way to show concentration and attentiveness is to close the eyes in contemplation and nod the head slight, up and down.
g) Japanese men like to avoid saying ”no“, but one gesture that is often used ti signal ”no“ or that ”something is very difficult“ is to tip the head backward and audibly suck air in through the teeth.
9. OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
a) A gesture saying ”I do not know,“ or ”I don't understand“ or ”No, I am undeserving“ is waving the hand back and forth in front of one's own face (palm outward).
b) The ”O.K.“ gesture in Japan may be interpreted as the signal for ”money“ or ”give me change in coins.“
c) Blowing your nose in public is considered rude. The handkerchief is used primarily for wiping the mouth or drying the hands when leaving the washroom. Paper tissues are used for blowing the nose and then discarded.
d) When entering a private home or traditional restaurants with tatami (bamboo mats) floors, it is usually customary to remove your shoes and place them with the toes pointing toward the outdoors.
10. BOWING
a) Many westerners view the bow as an act of subservience, but in Japan that would completely wrong. For the Japanese a bow signals respect and humility, two qualities coveted throughout Asia.
b) Although it is not absolutely necessary, but a slight bow demonstrate that you respect their customs. And in Japan, where style and grace and courteousness are revered, that simply act would surely be noted, appreciated, and probably remembered.
c) WHO BOWS FIRST? AND HOW LOW DOES ONE BOW? In Japanese, it is extremely important to know the rank of people with whom you come in contact.
i. ”The person of lower rank bows first and lowest.“
ii. ”The higher the rank of the person facing you, the lower you bow.“
iii. ”The lower the bow and the longer one holds the position, the stronger is the indication of respect, gratitude, sincerity, obeisance, humility, contriteness, etc.“
iv. With equals match bows, adding an extra one when you want to show a slight edge of respect.
v. When unsure of status, the safest move is to bow a shade less low than the other person.
vi. The proper form is to bow (about 15 degrees) with hands sliding down toward the knees or at the sides, back neck stiff, and eyes averted. The formal bow (about 30 degrees) with palms on knees and often bobbing up and down. Never bow with a hand (of both hands) in your pockets.
Korea
11. GREETING GESTURES
a) Among themselves, bowing is the traditional form for both greeting and departing.
b) Western and Korean male friends usually greet with both a slight bow and shaking hands. When shaking hands, both hands are sometimes used. Women usually do not shake hands, especially with men, but usually just nod slightly. The senior person offers to shake hands first, but the junior person bows first. However, shake hands with a light grip and perhaps with eyes averted.
c) Avoid hugging and kissing when greeting.
d) Prolonged direct eye contact is considered impolite and even intimidating.
e) Business cards are traded respectfully. Keep the card on the table in front of you as just one small gesture of respect.
f) When saying good-bye, the traditional gesture is the bow, but the younger generation has adopted the western custom of waving good-bye by moving their arm side-to-side.
12. TOUCHING GESTURES
a) Generally speaking, the Koreans are not a touch-oriented society (especially true for visitors.) So avoid touching or any prolonged form of body contact.
b) Public display of affection are very rare. On the other hand, you may note people of the same sex walking hand-in-hand, which is simply a gesture of friendship.
c) Don't worry about a bit of pushing in stores or when groups board public buses or trains. Apologies are neither offered or expected.
13. BECKONING GESTURES
a) The open hand or the middle finger is used for pointing.
b) To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion. Using the arm and hand up, palm toward the face is used only for calling dogs and children.
14. OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
a) Respect is always shown to elderly people, so it is appropriate to rise when a person-- especially an elderly man enters the room or giving up a seat on a subway. However, an elder may not give up a seat for a young boy.
b) Men generally have priority in Korea: Go through a door first, walk ahead of women, and women may help them on with their coats.
c) Among the Koreans, laughter is used to disguise many emotions: anger, frustration, and fear.
d) Loud talking or laughing is usually avoided. Koreans, especially women will cover their mouths laughing, resulting in giggling rather than wide open-mouth laughing.
e) Periods of silence are common and accepted, even during dinners.
f) Correct posture is important, especially when seated. Don't slouch or put your feet on desks or chairs. Try to maintain a balanced posture, stand or sit erectly or squarely. When seated have both feet squarely on the ground with arms in the lap or on the armrests. Crossing the legs at the knees or ankles is the preferred form rather than with one ankle over the other knee.
g) When walking in public, keep to the left side of the walkway and stairway.
15. OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
a) It is considered impolite to enter a room without knocking first. However, Koreans may not wait for you to come to the door and open it. They may knock and then enter.
b) When walking in public places, direct eye contact is uncommon in the larger cities. However, visitors may be the subject of much curiosity and therefore you may notice some stares.
c) Blowing you nose in public is considered rude, especially at a meal. Paper tissues are used for blowing the nose and then discarded.
d) When entering a private home, it is usually customary to remove your shoes.
e) Spitting (except for young women) and burping in public is acceptable.
Phillipines
16. GREETING GESTURES
a) Handshaking is the common custom, with both men and women shaking hands in a friendly and informal fashion.
b) Filipinos may greet one another with the ”eyebrow flash“ which is merely a quick lifting of the eyebrows.
17. TOUCHING GESTURES
a) Generally speaking, the Filipinos are a touch-oriented society.
b) People of the same sex may be seen holding hands in public places, which is simply a gesture of friendship.
c) Don't worry about a bit of pushing and shoving when using public transportation, Filipinos seldom queue or observe orderly lines.
18. BECKONING GESTURES
a) Instead of pointing to an object , Filipinos will shift their eyes toward it, or purse the lips and point with the mouth.
b) To beckon someone, the palm faces downward and the fingers are moved in a scratching motion. Never curl your index finger back and forth because that is considered insulting.
19. OTHER NONVERBAL GESTURES
a) It is considered rude to stare. Prolonged direct eye contact is considered impolite and even intimidating.
b) Respect is always shown to elderly people.
c) Among the Filipinos, laugher is used to convey both enjoyment and pleasure but also to mask embarrassment over another person's misfortune.
d) Speaking in aloud voice is considered ill-mannered and rude.
3．Words and expressions from Unit 4 Body language
major a. a major earthquake 大地震，a major problem 重大问题，a major subject 主修科目
local a. local customs地方风俗，a local pain 局部疼痛， 当地时间 local time
represent v. represent a club as its chief executive以总经理的身份代表俱乐部，represent by signs 用符号代表
curious a. be curious about other’s people business 对别人的事情太好奇
Introduce v. introduce her as his daughter 介绍说她是自己的女儿， be introduced from… 从…传来的，introduce…to sb. 向某人介绍……
approach v. & n. cautiously approached the house 小心地走近那房子, approach the manager about … 同经理谈……， approach the question as a scientist 从科学家的角度来处理这一问题，Snow announced the approach of winter. 雪宣告了冬季的来临。I like her approach to the problem. 我喜欢她解决这个问题的方法。
touch v. & n. She lightly touched his forehead. 她轻轻地摸了摸他的前额。 Don't touch the exhibits. Few students in our school can touch him in music. 在音乐方面,我们学校很少有学生能与他相比。I was touched beyond words. 我感动得无法形容。They did not touch this topic in their talk. 他们在会谈中没有触及这个问题。The rain touched the crops. 这场雨使庄稼受害。They sat so close that their heads nearly touched. 他们坐得那么近,头都差不多碰到一起了。In his talk he touched on/upon the state of affairs in Latin America. 谈话中他提到了拉丁美洲的局势。Our ship is to touch at Hongkong tomorrow morning. 我们的船将于明天上午停靠香港。It will break at a touch. 那东西一碰就破。Let's stay in touch. 我们保持联络。He's added a few finishing touches to his novel. 他给小说作了最后润色。He has a touch with birds. 他擅长养鸟。The young man recited his poems with a touch of pride. 那个青年带点骄傲地朗诵他的诗作。
cheek n. The little girl has rosy cheeks. 那个小女孩脸颊红润。 He had the cheek to ask me for money. 他竟厚着脸皮向我要钱。How can you cheek your grandparents in that way? 你怎么可以那样无礼地对祖父母讲话?
learned a. The more learned a man is, the more modest he usually is. 人愈有学问,往往愈是谦虚。learned books 学术性书籍
stranger n. I feel strange in the presence of strangers. 在陌生人面前,我感到不自在。 Sorry, I don't know. I'm a stranger here myself. 对不起,我不清楚。我对这里也不熟。He is no stranger to sorrow. 他饱经忧患。I'm a stranger to statistics. 我对统计学一窍不通。
spoken a. They built a robot capable of understanding spoken commands. 他们制造了一个能懂口头指令的机器人。He is a shy soft-spoken person. 他害羞,说话轻声细语的。
express v. & n. Really, I hardly know how to express my gratitude. 我真不知道如何表达我的感激之情。The doctor expressed poison from her wound. 医生把毒液从她的伤口挤了出来。Please send this parcel by express delivery. 请用快递寄送这个包裹。The doctor gave express orders that the patient was to have no visitors. 医生明确嘱咐,那个病人不可会客。We took an express bus home. 我们乘特快公车回家。They painted the house for the express purpose for selling it. 他们专为卖房而油漆房子。Please send the parcel express.
action n. The quick action of the firemen saved the building from being burned down. 消防队员行动及时,该建筑物方免遭焚毁。The action of water on rock should be taken into account. 应考虑到水对岩石的作用。All the action in the play takes place at one railroad station. 该剧的整个情节均发生在一座火车站里。Finally she had to file an action for divorce. 最后她只好提出离婚诉讼。
posture n. a sitting posture 坐姿, They are trying to adopt a more cooperative posture. 他们正试图采取更为合作的态度。He enjoys posturing in front of an audience. 他喜欢在观众面前装腔作势。
likely a. & a. John is likely to be in London this autumn. 今年秋天约翰可能在伦敦。 The park is a likely place for the picnic. 这公园倒是个适合野餐的地方。 We will most likely be late. 我们很有可能会迟到。
Muslim n. & a. A Muslim is a believer in or follower of Islam. The word Muslim means one who submits and implies complete submission to the will of God (Allah). Muslims believe that nature is itself Islamic, since it follows natural laws placed by God. Thus, a Muslim strives to surrender to God's commands every step of the way.
The holiest book for Muslims is the Qur'an, or the 'Koran' in English. Muslims consider the Arabic Qur'an as the direct revelation of God; translations do exist to other languages but are not regarded as the literal word of God.
Other canonical texts of the Muslim include the hadith which are recordings of the life of the prophet made by the people who were around him. Many matters not specifically mentioned in the Qur'an are covered in the hadith. The degree to which the hadith are authoritative depends on the sect which a Muslim is from.
The basic beliefs of Muslims are: belief in God, His angels, His revealed Books, His Messengers, the Day of Judgement, and the Al Qadar (which is a form of divine pre-destination). The revealed books of Islam also include the Injil (Christian Gospels), the Torah and the Psalms.
The Five Pillars of Islam on which a Muslim's life is founded are:
The Testimony that there is none worthy of worship except God and that Muhammad is his messenger.
Establishing of the five daily Prayers (Salaah). These prayers are ritualistic in nature and adherence to the ritual practice is required. The location at which one prays is not strictly defined as long as one is able to establish the Qiblat.
The Giving of Zakaah (charity), which is generally 2.5% of the yearly savings for a rich man working in trade or industry, and 10% or 20% of the produce for agriculturists. This money or produce is distributed among the poor.
Refraining from eating, drinking and having sex from dawn to dusk in the month of Ramadhaan (Sawm).
The Pilgrimage (Hajj) to Mecca during the month of Zul Hijjah, which is compulsory once in a lifetime for one who has the ability to do it. This ability includes the financial means and the physical strength since the hajj can be strenuous. Also, one has to obtain a permit from the Saudi government which is granted based on an annual quota based on country.
comedy n. Comedy is the use of humour in the performing arts. It also means a performance that relies heavily on humor. The term originally comes from theater, where it simply referred to a play with a happy ending, in contrast to a tragedy. The humor, once an incidental device used to entertain, is now an essential aspect of a comedy.
A recognised characteristic of comedy is that it is an intensely personal enjoyment. People frequently fail to find the same things amusing, but when they do it can help to create powerful bonds.
Warming up
Teaching aims:
To introduce six great women and their achievements.
Teaching key points and difficult points:
To explain some words: Quaker, China Welfare Institute, campaign, etc.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
1. Do you know any great people or important people? (Show some pictures to Ss)
2. What qualities make a great person?
(clever, brave, determined, confident, hard-working, unselfish, kind, active, generous…)
Step 2 Warming up
1. Pictures and Questions (Page 1)
Ask Ss read the introduction of six women and answer the following questions:
Elizabeth Fry: What did she do to help the prisoners?
Soong Qingling: Who is she? What’s her great achievement?
Jane Goodall: What’s her achievement in the study of Chimps?
Jody Williams: What did she get in 1997?
Joan of Arc: Do you know the name of the girl in ancient China whose experience was similar to her?
Lin Qiaozhi: What’s her major?
Step 3 Talking
1. Which of these women do you think is a great woman?
2. To be a great woman, what qualities do you think should she have? Look at the list of qualities that were discussed when we examined a great man. Are there any other qualities that you would like to add?
(intelligent, determined, generous, kind, modest, unselfish, hard-working, brave, confident,
considerate, thoughtful, energetic, imaginative, honest, decisive, sensible…)
Step 4 Discussion
1. Do you know a woman who really inspires (encourages) you? Describe her and explain why.
Tips: What does she look like? Why did she choose to …?
What do you think about..? What are her reputations?
Why do you admire her? What are her contributions?
How would you describe her?
2. Is it harder for women to become famous or get jobs in high positions? Why?
Step5 Language points
1. achieve vt./vi.
1) to get sth. done by working hard / as the result of an action or effort 完成；实现
The reason I achieve good results is because I work hard-and so could you.
我取得好成绩的原因是因为我学习努力。你也能够做到。
2) vi. succeed 成功；达到
He achieved because he was a hard worker. 他成功是因为他工作努力。
△achievement n.
As we climbed the final few metres, we felt a sense of achievement.
当我们爬完最后几米时，我们感到一种成功感。
2. condition n. [C/U] 条件；状况
The astronauts soon got used to the condition of weightlessness.
宇航员们很快就适应了失重的状态。
My computer’s a few years old, but it’s in really good condition.
我的电脑用了好几年了，但是性能还是很好。
3.concern onself with sb./sth. 关心某人/某事；为…担忧/烦恼
A teacher should love his students, and concern himself with their needs and desires.
老师应该爱护学生，关心他们的需求。
4. connection n.联系
connection between A and B A与B 的联系
Is there a connection between smoking and lung cancer? 吸烟和肺癌有联系吗?
connection with / to sth. 与…有联系
His failure has no connection with the quality of his work.他的失败与他的工作性质没有联系。
5. drive… out (of) : to force someone or something to leave 把…赶出去
The Chinese fought hard for 8 years and drove the Japanese aggressors out of China.
中国人民抗战八年,把日本侵略者赶出中国。
6. campaign n.战役；（政治或商业性）活动；运动
The plan of campaign had been made long before the war broke out.
作战计划早在战争爆发前就制定好了。
Bush’s campaign succeeded and he won the election again.布什竞选成功，再次当选总统。
Europe has started a campaign to stop people smoking.欧洲发起了一场戒烟运动。
△war, campaign, battle, fight/fighting 都与战争有关，但其规模排序为：
war >campaign >battle >fight/fighting
Gulf War 海湾战争 Huaihai Campaign 淮海战役
Pingxingguan Battle平型关大战 Battle of Waterloo 滑铁卢战役
△campaign, movement, activity 都与“活动”有关。campaign指为了达到某一目的而采取的一项或一系列积极有力的措施。如：an election campaign 竞选活动。
movement指社会或政治运动，如：the movement for national liberation 民族解放运动。 还指移动、动作、姿势等。
activity多指消遣活动或教育活动，如：
Too many out-of-class activities take up too much of our precious time for study.
7. devote vt. to use all or most of your time, effort, etc. 献身；致力于；专心于
devoted adj. [to] loyal; caring a great deal; fond of 忠诚的；挚爱的
△devote sth. to sth. / doing sth. 献身于/致力于/专心于（做）某事
devote oneself to sth./ doing sth.
be devoted to sth. / doing sth.
△be devoted to sb. 对某人忠诚/喜爱某人
Soong Chingling devoted all her life to the Chinese revolution and construction.
宋庆龄一生致力于中国的革命和建设事业。
a devoted wife / friend / father 忠诚的妻子/忠实的朋友/关怀备至的父亲
Step 6 Assignments
1. Revise the new words.
2. Discuss the two questions in “Pre-reading”.
3. Preview “Reading”.
Unit 1 Women of achievement
The First Period Reading
Teaching goals 教学目标
1． Target language 目标语言
a. 重点词汇
achieve, achievement, condition, welfare, institute, connection, campaign, organization, specialist, behave, behavior, worthwhile, nest, observe, observation, respect, argue, entertainment, inspire, support, devote ... to
b. 重点句子
Watching a family of chimps wake up is our first activity of the day. P2
Everybody sits and waits while the animals in the group begin to wake up and move. P2
But the evening makes it all worthwhile. P2
... we see them go to sleep together in their nest for the night. P2
Only after her mother came to help her for the first few months was she allowed to begin her project. P2
For forty years Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals. P2
2． Ability goals 能力目标
a. Learn Warming Up, and know how to tell the great women and the famous women.
b. Learn the way to describe a person from what the person did, what she/he looks like and so on.
3． Learning ability goals 学能目标
Teach Ss how to describe a person.
Teaching important points 教学重点
a. By reading A protector of African wildlife, students can learn from Jane Goodall in at least two aspects: one is what is the humane way to study animals; the other is that it was her great personality - universal love and mercy（博爱与慈悲 ）that made her successful. If everyone had such kind of heart, they would give everything benefit for all living things. Then our world will be full of love and peace, without any war and starvation.
b. Ask students to answer these questions:
1) What made her a great success?
2) What should we learn from Jane Goodall?
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
Let everyone believe that all of us can become Jane Goodall.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Inspiration, Questioning and Discussion.
Teaching aids 教具准备
A computer, a projector and a recorder.
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
StepⅠLead-in
T: Good morning, everyone! Haven’t seen you for a long time. Did you have a good time in your holidays? What did you do during the holidays?
S1: Yes, I had a good time. You know I enjoy movies, sports and other types of entertainment. I saw several favorite films and every afternoon, I would play basketball with my friends.
S2: I would die of boredom. I didn’t know what to do but read. I didn’t know how to relax myself. I just hoped that the new term began. The sooner, the better.
T: That sounds interesting. In fact, boredom is a kind of feeling. There is a good way to be away from it. Believe it or not, that is to help others, no matter who they are, human being or animals. Have a try, Ok? Today we’ll learn Unit 1. It introduces several women to us and tells us how they live and work. Now let’s turn to Page 1. Look at these pictures and the brief introductions, then work in pairs to discuss which of these women you think is a great woman. You need to give your reasons for your choice.
Give students 3 minutes to do this task, and then ask some of them to speak out their choices. Teacher should give them some guide. For example, what is her ambition? What are the problems she met? And what are her sacrifices? After that the teacher can refer to the chart on Page 11 in the reference book. And then give them a brief summary about their discussion.
A sample summary:
As great women, they don’t care for themselves at all, and at some point or rather, they must give some sacrifices, just like Lin Qiaozhi, she devoted all her life to medical work for Chinese women and children and had chosen not to have a family of her own. Instead, she made sure that about 50,000 babies were safely delivered to their mothers. Not all people can do this. Once they have chosen their careers, they would carry on with them without any withdrawal. What they did is encouraging thousands of people to continue their careers. Those who are only famous but not great can’t be matched.
StepⅡReading
There are four tasks in this step:
a. Pre-reading to find the main idea of each paragraph.
b. Making a chart of the text structure.
c. Language points.
d. Comprehending.
Task 1 Pre-reading
There are 3 paragraphs in the text, and each one has its main idea. These main ideas support the title A protector of African wildlife. Teacher can give students some time to read the text quickly and find these main ideas to form a overview of the text.
T: How many paragraphs are there in the text?
Ss: Three.
T: What are the main ideas of theirs?
S1: The first paragraph is about a day in Combe National Park.
S2: The second one tells us how Jane Goodall did her research and the achievement she has made in her research.
S3: The third one tells us her influence to the world.
T: OK. Can we divide the text in this way? There are four paragraphs in the text. The first one is about a day in the park. The second one is her way of doing her research and some achievement. The third one is her attitude and feeling to the animals. And the last one is a short summary to her.
Ss: That’s right.
T: Thanks. Well, let’s draw a chart of the text together according to the main ideas we’ve found.
Task 2 Making a chart
A protector of African wildlife
↓
① ② ③
│ ∣ ∣
A day in the park Jane’s way to study chimps Her attitude to and her achievement the animals
↓
④
She has achieved everything she wanted to do.
Task 3 Language Points
T: By now, we have mastered the main idea and the details. Do you have some difficulties in the language?
S1: Yes. What does this sentence mean: “Watching a family of chimps wake up is our first activity of the day”?
T: Who’d like to help her?
S2: The subject of the sentence is a “V-ing form”, and the Predicate is “is” not “wake up”. So the meaning of the sentence is: 今天我们的第一件事是观察一个猩猩家庭的早起。
T: That’s right. Sometimes we should depend on the structure of the sentences to help us understand the meaning.
S3: Miss Wu, the sentence: “This means going back to a place where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before.” is beyond me.
T: This sentence is a little difficult. First, it includes an Attributive Clause. The clause is: where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before. Second, there are two structures in the sentence. One is “to mean doing”; the other is “leave ... doing”. For the first one, we can refer to the Appendices in Page 76. Now let’s look at the second one. In fact, there are several same structures in this text. Please look at these sentences.
Show the sentences on the screen:
1. ... where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before.
2. ... we see them go to sleep together in their nest for the night.
3. But the evening makes it all worthwhile.
4. ... was she allowed to begin her project.
5. ... Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals.
T: Now look at the boldface（黑体字）. All the structures of the Predicates are Verb + Object + Object Complement. Let’s translate these sentences to taste the meaning and usage of Object Complement.
Ask some of the students to translate these sentences. Give them some explanations: When we use -ing form as Object Complement, it means this act is continuing. For example, Sentence 1. When we use -to do form as Object Complement, it means this process of the act has finished or to begin. We can take Sentence 2 and 4 for example. When we use an objective as Object Complement, it means that it shows us a kind of state. We can take sentence 3 and 5 for example. If possible, teacher still can give them more examples about this structure.
I heard the teacher call my name.
I will let you know the result of the voting as soon as possible.
We watch the children diving into the water from the top diving board.
Let’s go, let him alone.
S4: Miss Wu, I find this sentence a bit strange: Only after her mother came to help her for the first few months was she allowed to begin her project.
T: Yeah, this sentence uses the structure of inversion. The sign is that only phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence. We will learn it later. Now it is Ok that you know the meaning of the sentence. Any questions?
Ss: No.
Task 4 Comprehending
T: Do you still have any questions? No? Ok, let’s finish next task. Read the text again and try to finish Exercise 1&2 in Page 3 as quickly as you can.
Give students some time to do this. After that, check the answers with the whole class.
Step Ⅲ Discussion
When we are guiding students to read something, besides hoping that they can learn some basic knowledge the material shows, we still hope they can learn something that can reflect the spirit of human being. This is the most important thing a teacher should show to students.
Ask students to work in groups of four and discuss the following questions:
1.What made her a great success?
2.What should we learn from Jane Goodall?
T: I think, there is not a single person who doesn’t admire success. But what is the way to succeed? Now we have read Jane Goodall, can you make sure what made her a great success, and what we should learn from her? Please discuss these two questions, and then some of you will report your opinions to all the class.
Give students some time to discuss.
T: Boys and girls, have you finished your discussion? How about your group?
G1: We think that there are two points that made her successful. One is her way to study chimps, and the other is her true love to the animals. The first one is facile (易做到的), because it is only a way. Everyone can do it. But for the second one, it is more easily said than done. As a woman, she gave up everything, went to the forest to study the chimps and devoted all her love to these animals. It is really not easy. What we cannot understand is that how she has such great personality.
T: These are very interesting questions. As far as I know, it is her relief that raised her personality. Everything is equal, no matter what they are. It isn’t because we are human being that we are superior to the other living thing. We don’t have any right to control other living thing. We all live on the same planet, they are our brothers or sisters. The only difference is that we have different shapes and have different wisdom. If you have the same love to the things around you, you can turn to be her. OK, how about the second question?
G2: At first, we admire she had the wisdom and courage to give up her chance to go to university and went to Africa to begin her own research. This makes us think over what we should think when we are choosing our majors or a university. Secondly, most of us think that man is the master of the world, because he is the most intelligent animal on the earth. So he can decide every thing he thinks right, including doing some experiments on animals, in spite of their pains. Jane not only saw this, but also tried her best to help them and argued for them to be left in the wild and not used for entertainment or advertisements. What she said in the text is very moving. It shows her deeply love to the animals. We should learn this from her. In fact, there are so much we should learn from her, her consideration, her hard work and so on.
StepⅣ Listening
Have a listening. Let students listen to the reading material, follow and repeat it, pay attention to the new words and expressions, as well as the sentence structures they have learned just now.
StepⅤ Homework
T: I’m very glad to hear what you said. You have learned what you should learn from Jane Goodall. And I believe you will be Jane Goodall, if you treat everything around you equally and show your love to them. Now time is up. Today’s homework is to finish the exercises in Page 4 and 5. Make some preparations for the next class. See you next time.
Ss: See you.
Grammar
Teaching goals
1. Target language
a. Important phrases.
achievement, inspire, worthwhile, observe, institute, respect , condition, argue, entertainment
b. Key sentences.
Our group are all going to visit the chimps in the forest
Our group includes six boys and five girls.
2.Ability goals
a. Enlarge vocabulary by learning word-formation.
b. Learn to use Subject-verb agreement correctly.
3.Learning ability goals
Teach students how to enlarge vocabulary by word-formation and how to use subject-verb agreement. Teaching important points
Noun Suffix in word-formation.
Subject-verb agreement of collective nouns.
Teaching difficult points
Enable students to use collective nouns correctly, by understanding their meanings in certain situations.
Teaching methods
Let students do the exercises, and then collect their answers. Ask them to conclude the rules and then give them some explanation.
Teaching aids
A projector.
Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Revision
Review the text by checking the answers for Exercises 2, 3 and 4 on Page 4 and 5. These exercises are about the useful words that appear in the text.
Step II Word-formation
There are two tasks in this part. One is leading in, in which teacher trys to give students as many words as possible. Let them guess the meanings of the words. The second one is to finish Exercise 1 on Page 4.
Derivation is one of the most important word-formation. It is helpful in enlarging students' vocabulary. Teachers can give them enough words, and let them guess the meaning of these words. As a result of this, students will be interested in the word-formation, and begin to use the method to guide their word study in their daily life.
T: Just now we reviewed some words in the text. Now please look at these words on the screen and say the meanings of them.
Organize Organization State Statement
Discuss Discussion Entertain Entertainment
Direct Direction Consider Consideration
Decide Decision Agree Agreement
Prepare Preparation Achieve Achievement
Inform Information Treat Treatment
Deter- Determination Improve Improvement
Express Expression Encourge Encouragement
Examine Examination Enjoy Enjoyment
Educate Education Govern Government
Feel Feeling Find Finding
Begin Beginning Mean Meaning
T: From the above chart we can see that with knowledge of word-formation, we can enlarge our vocabulary. Today, we'll focus our attention on the Noun Suffix. There are many Noun Suffixes in English. In this unit, we'll learn -ment, -ing, -ation, -ist and so on. Now let's finish Exercise 1 in Page 4.
Let students finish Exercise 1. Check their answers with the whole class.
T: Here are some other noun Suffixes on the screen. Read it and write down them in your note books. Noun Suffix
-er(fighter) -or(sailor) -ist(artist)
-ant(assistant) -ee(employee) -ian(librarian)
-tion(attention) -ment(government) -dom(freedom)
-ness(carefulness) -ism(socialism) -ship(friendship)
-ure(pleasure) -ty(society) -ence(reference)
Let students do it, and then check the answers with the whole class.
Step III Discovering useful structures
Tell students what they should do next. Ask them to read the EXAMPLE in Exercise 1 on Page 5. Make sure that they know what they should do. Finish Exercise 1, and check the answers.
T: Do you have any questions?
Ss: Sometimes it's difficult to decide whether the meaning of the subject tends to single or plurality. T: This is a good question. Although we know that if the word refers to different members, use a plural, and if the word is considered as a whole, use a singular verb, we still find it is difficult to use this in our practice. I think what we should do is to practice again and again. Try to experience the meaning of the word in the situation. That's the way to solve this problem. Ok, let's finish Exercise 2 on Page 5.
Let students do it. They can have a discussion to check the answers. After that, check with the whole class, to fact teacher should enlarge this structure for students. Die grammar chart in the reference book on Page 5, is a good one to let students know more about subject-verb agreement. If possible teacher could show all the grammar knowledge to students. This is especially useful for those who would like to learn English Grammar.
1．两个或两个以上做主语的单数名词用and连接，谓语用复数．
Tom and Dick _______ (be) good friends.
但若表示一个集合体时则用单数。
A singer and dancer ______ (be) present at the party.
The worker and writer ___ (be) talking to the students.
Bread and butter ________ (taste) good.
(a needle and thread, a horse and cart, a watch and chain, a coat and tie, truth and honesty, medical help and cure)
2．用 and 连接的两个名词若被 no, each, every, many a 修饰，则谓语动词用单数。
No bird and no beast ______ (be) seen in the bare island.
Many a boy and many a girl ______ (have) made such a funny experiment.
At Christmas each boy and each girl _____(be) given a present.
3．两个主语由not only…but also, or, either…or, neither…nor 等连接时，谓语动词与第二个主语保持一致．
Either he or I _____ (be) to go there.
______ (be) either you or he going to attend the meeting?
4.主语后有as well as, like, with, together with, but, except, besides,等，谓语应于前面主语保持一致．
A professor, together with some students, _____ (be) sent to help in the work.
No one but the teachers _____ (be) allowed to use the room.
5．一些集合名词做主语，如果看作一个整体，谓语动词用单数；如果指其中的成员，谓语用复数．如audience, committee，class(班级),crew（全体船员或机组人员), family, government, public(公众)等，
但people, police, cattle等只能用复数．
My family _____ (be) a big family.
My family _____ (be) listening to the radio.
The police ____ (be) trying to catch the thief.
6.通常作复数的集体名词
有些集体名词，如police, people, cattle, militia, poultry(家禽),)等，通常作复数，用复数动词。例如：
Domestic cattle ______(provide) us with milk, beef and hides.
7.通常作不可数名词的集体名词
有一些集体名词，如machinery, equipment, furniture, merchandise (商品)，clothing 通常作不可数名词，随后的动词用单数。例如：
The merchandise _____(have) arrived undamaged.
All the machinery in the factory ____ (be) made in China.
8．表示时间、重量、长度等名词，尽管是复数形式，但作为一个整体看，谓语还是用单数。
Five minutes ______ (be) enough.
One dollar and seventy eight cents _____ (be) what she has.
9. all 作为主语，代表人物时，一般用作复数；代表整个事件或情况时，一般 看作单数。
All that I want _____ (be) a good dictionary.
All ______ (be) silent. 人人都缄口无言。万籁俱寂。
All ______ (be) out of danger.
10．形容词加定冠词 the 表示一类人时，谓语动词用复数。
What a life the poor were living!
The young _____happy to give their seats to the old.
11．who, which, that 作定语从句的主语时，其谓语取决于先行词。
Those who want to go should sign your names here.
He is one of the students who have passed the exam.
He is the only one of the students who has passed the exam.
12. 以-ics结尾的学科名称
某些以-ics结尾的学科名称，如physics(物理学)、mathematics(数学)、mechanics(机械学)、politics(政治学)、statistics(统计学)、economics(经济学)、linguistics(语言学）athletics(体育学)、等，通常作单数用。例如：
13. 其他以-s结尾的名词
英语中有一些由两个部分组成的物体名称通常是以-s结尾，如scissors(剪子)，pincers(钳子)，glasses(眼镜），shorts(短裤)，trousers(裤子)，suspenders(吊裤带)等。这一类名词，如果不带”一把“、”一副“、”一条“等单位词而单独使用，通常作复数。例如：
如果带有单位词，则由单位词的单、复数形式决定动词的单、复数形式。 例如：One pair of scissors isn't enough.
14.以-s结尾的地理名称
某些以-s结尾的地理名称，如果是国名，如the United States, the United Nations, the Netherlands等，尽管带有复数词尾，但系单一政治实体，故作单数用。但若不是国名，而是群岛、山脉、海峡、瀑布等地理名称、通常作复数用。例如：
The West Indies, apart from the Bahamas, are commonly divided into two parts. The Himalayas（喜马拉雅山脉) have a magnificent variety of plant and animal life.
The Straits of Gibraltar have not lost their strategic importance.
15. 英语中还有一些以-s结尾的名词，如:
arms(武器), clothes(衣服), contents(内容，目录) fireworks(烟火), goods(货物), minutes(记录), morals(道德，品行), remains(遗体), stairs(楼梯), suburbs (郊区), thanks(谢意), wages(工资)等，
通常作复数。
16.凡是由-ings结尾的名词，如: clippings (剪下来的东西), diggings (掘出的东西), earnings (收入), filings (锉屑), lodgings (租住的房屋), surroundings (环境), sweepings (扫拢的垃圾) 等, 通常作复数用。例如：
The clippings of the hedges are usually burnt.
The sweepings of the godown(仓库) have been disposed of.
17. 还有一些以-s接的单、复数同形的名词，如: headquarters(总部), means(方法、手段), series(系列), species(种类), works(工厂)等，随后动词的单、复数形式取决于这些名称是作单数，还是用作复数。例如：
A headquarters was set up to direct the operation (指挥作战).
Their headquarters are in Paris.
The only means to achieve success is to appeal to arms (诉诸武力).
18. remains用于”遗体“意义时，随后的动词通常作复数：
His remains lie in the churchyard.
The martyr's remains were buried at the foot of the hill.
但作”遗迹“或”剩余物“解释时，可作复数或单数用：
Here is the remains of a temple.
The remains of the meal were/was fed to the dog.
19. 如果作主语的名词词组由“分数(或百分数)+of-词组”构成，其动词形式依of-词组中名词类别而定。例如：
Two thirds of the swampland(沼泽地) _____ (have) been reclaimed(开垦).
Over sixty per cent of the city ____ (be) destroyed in the war.
Thirty-five per cent of the doctors ______ (be) women.
20. 如果主语是all of ...,some of ...,none of ...,half of ...,most of ...等表示非确定数量的名词词组，其后的动词形式依of-词组中的名词类别而定。例如：
Most of the money _____ recovered by Deputy Player.
Most of the members ______ there.
All of the cargo ______ lost.
All of the crew ______ saved.
21.两数相减或相除，动词用单数；两数相加或相乘，动词可用单数，也可用复数。例如：
Forty minus fifteen (40-15) leaves twenty-five.
Forty divided by eight (40/8) is five.
Seven and five (7+5) makes/make twelve.
Five times eight (5+8) is /are forty.
22. 如果主语是由“a kind/sort/type of ,this kind/sort/type of +名词”构成，动词用单数。例如：
This kind of man annoys me.
但若在kind/sort/type之前的限定词是these/those,同时，of-词组中的名词又是复数，则动词用复数：
These kinds of men annoy me.
Those types/sorts of machines are up to date.
23.如果主语是由“many a+名词”或“more than one +名词”构成，其意义虽属多数，但随后的动词仍遵循“语法一致”原则，用单数。例如：
Many a man has done his duty.
More than one game was lost.
24. 1)由who, why, how, whether等wh-词引导的名词性分句作主语，其后的动词通常用单数。
2).两个由and连接的并列名词性分句作主语，如果主语表示两件事情，动词用复数。例如：
What caused the accident and who was responsible for it remain a mystery to us.
3). 以what-分句作主语的SVC结构
在以what-分句作主语的SVC结构中，主句补语是复数名词，如果主句谓语动词可用复数。
25. 1).在“one of+复数名词+关系分句”结构中，关系分句动词通常依照语法一致原则用复数形式。例如：
Joan is one of those people who go out of thier way to be helpful.
2). 在这类结构之前有定冠词the或者有the only 等限定词和强调词时，关系分句动词形式依one而定，用单数。例如：
Selfishness is the one of her many faults which defeats itself.
Listening
Teaching goals
1. Target language
Men have more chances to get to the top of their career than women.
Why did Joan have to dress up as a man to become a solider?
2. Ability goals
Enable students to know something about Joan and let students realize women can be the same success as men and know something about the International Campaign to Ban landmines.
3. Learning ability goals
Help students learn how to get required information by listening.
Teaching important and difficult points
Train to get the key words by reading the questions before listening.
Teaching methods
Instruction and practice.
Teaching aids
A recorder.
Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Revision
T: Pleased to meet you again!
Ss: Me, too.
T: Zhao, why do you look so tired?
S; He stayed up yesterday.
T: Why?
S: Don't listen to him. I just have had a cold.
T: You'd better, have some thicker clothes. The weather is rather cold these days.
S: Thank you, Miss Wu.
T;: Now, let's begin our class. Have you finished your homework?
Ss: Yes.
T: Well, now I'll show you answers on the screen. Check your answers by yourselves. If you have any questions, please let me know. After doing this, teachers can continue the next step.
Step II Listening to the material on Page 7
There are three tasks in this step: the first listening, the second listening and the third listening. Teachers should ask students to glance the whole exercises before listening, so that they can realize what is the main task in listening.
Task 1 The first listening
T: Hello, everyone! Glad to meet you. These days the topic we are talking is important women & great women. We know women can achieve the same as
men. But they have many difficulties in doing this. Today we'll have three listening materials to listen. The first one tells us some particular problems, which women have when they want a career of their own. The structure of this material is very clear. It is organized by the first, second and third paragraph. So when you listen for the first time, try to get the general idea of the material and think which sentences are the main ideas of the three paragraphs. Now let's listen for the first time. Play the tape for the first time for students to get the main ideas of the paragraphs. And then ask students to try to retell what they have heard. It doesn't matter whether they
are some details, such as words or sentences, or they are some main ideas. Because the purpose of doing this is to let students know they have caught some information. Everything is OK.
Collect what they have heard and write down them on the blackboard. Teachers can let them discuss which are main ideas and which are details.
Task 2 The second listening
There are two purposes in this task. One is to let students finish Exercise 2; the other is to let students get some useful information to finish Exercise 1 and 3. So after the discussion, teachers can let students look through the Exercises on Page 7 in order to catch the useful information to finish the exercises when they are listening. Then play the tape again, and try to finish Exercise 1&2. Exercise 1 is about some details. Exercise 2 is about the main ideas of each paragraph. Teacher can make a pause, and repeat it where the main ideas appear to make sure students can catch it.
Task 3 The third listening
This is a good chance for students to check their answers. After listening twice, most students can have a good understanding about the material, and can write down the answers mostly. So this time is for their checking and adding their answers.
If they still have some difficulties, play the tape for the fourth time to meet their needs.
Step III The listening material on Page 41
Teacher can ask students to guess the content of the material, according to the questions in exercises. And then have a listening and finish the exercises. The steps of the listening are the same with the above one.
Step IV Listening material on Page 44
This is a short dialogue between Jody Williams and a journalist. If students want to know something about the dialogue, they must pay attention to the questions. Ex 2 in the Listening Task offers some information. They can guide students to get what they are required to get. So it is necessary to tell students to read the chart carefully ahead, and then listen to the tape. Students can write down some notes instead of the whole sentences.
Step V Homework
T: Today, we learned something about women. I believe what they did and what they are facing may give us some inspirations. For girls we should believe that although we may face some difficulty, we are able to try our best to realize our dreams. OK, today's homework is to read the article A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME and make some preparations for the speaking in Page 7. That's all for today, bye, everyone.
Ss: Bye, teacher.
For most students it is difficult to finish all the three listening materials in one class. So teachers can make one of them as homework, let students listen to it after class.
课前导学
1.预习：Part A
2.重要短语：
1). 消减；缩减；减少___________ 2) 自由发言___________
3）原材料___________ 4）用尽___________
5）对…担心___________ 6）只要___________
7）砍到___________ 8）四处打听___________
3.根据课文内容完成下面的表格：
Speakers Lin Shuiqing
( a1._________ from the
Green Society ) Qian Liwei
( a business development
2.______________)
Points
Economic development is bad for the 3.___________
A healthy environment and development should be 4._________ at the same time.
5._______________
Large areas of the world are damaged by chemical 6.______________.
People suffer from air and water pollution.
Much sea life being 7._________ by fishing boats.
Many factories and industries control the amount of pollution they produce.
They are careful to spend money 10.__________ any damage they cause.
The people 11.__________ these factories are concerned about the environment.
Suggestions
8._______ back on production and reducing the amount of things people make and buy.
Thinking more about 9.__________ our waste.
Teaching people ways of living that do not harm the environment.
Producing more things from
12.________ that have been recycled.
Better 13._________ to preserve the environment.
Paying higher 14.________ for polluting the environment.
4. 根据Reading部分的课文内容选择正确答案：
(1)Mr. Qian Li wei approves of the following points except _________.
A.large amounts of fish are being caught by fishing boats before they can lay eggs.
B.People are more important than fish and trees.
C.We should produce more things from recycled products.
D.We need more effective laws to preserve the environment, which still allow the economy to grow.
(2)Which of the following statements can suggest that we can achieve a balance between the economy and environment ?
A.Many people are willing to pay slightly higher prices for things that are environmentally friendly.
B.Many people, old and young, are doing their best to protect their surroundings.
C.Our country has passed the law that factories which pollute the environment should have to pay higher taxes.
D.All of the above.
教学过程
词汇讲解
1. debate vi./n. 辩论，争辩，争论
debate with sb. about/on sth._____________ hold a debate ___________
beyond debate ______________ under debate ___________
1)We are _______________or not to have a trip this summer. 我们盘算着今年夏天是否去旅游。
2) She debated with herself for a while, and then picked up the phone.
辨析debate/ argue/ discuss
debate 指正式辩论，着重双方“各抒己见”
argue 着重“说理，争论”和“企图说服”
discuss 着重“讨论，磋商”
3) We ____________with the waiter about the price of the meal. 我们跟服务员争执那顿饭的钱。
4) Have you _________ the problem with anyone? 你与谁商量过这个问题？
5) We _________ the proposal for three days. 那个建议我们辩论了三天
2. operate
The doctor operated on the baby’s throat.
What skills are needed to operate this machine?
Illegal drinking clubs continue to operate in the city.
Soldiers cannot operate effectively without good food.
拓展：
operating system _____________ operating table_____________
perform an operation on _____________ in operation _____________
put/ bring sth into operation _____________ come/ go into operation _____________
3. credit 荣誉，赞扬；信用，信赖;名声，信誉;赊账，信用贷款；学分
He deserves credit for what he has done for the city.
Your honesty does you great credit / does great credit to you.
We gave credit to his story.
George has credit with his teacher.
He is a man of great credit in our town.
Greatly to his credit, he won the prize.
I bought the dishwasher on credit.
He hasn’t enough credits to get his degree.
4. responsibility
We have responsibility for protecting them.
You must take responsibility for what you have done.
Mike is responsible for the whole project.
5. cut back on
To save money, we should cut back on our spending.
Many companies are cutting back on staff at the moment.
If we cannot sell more, we will have to cut back on production.
6. use up / run out/ run out of
Don’t use up all the milk. We need some for breakfast.
Her money soon ran out.
She is always running out of money before payday.
难句分析
1.With me are Ms Lin Shuiqing, from the Green Society, and Mr Qian Liwei, a business development consultant.(P22 Line5)
【句式研习】 该句是一个______句，由于主语 “Ms Lin Shuiqing, from the Green Society, and Mr Qian Liwei, a business development consultant” 较长，为了避免句子___________，往往把介词短语 或其他成分提到句首。
【归纳拓展】
1）当句首状语为方位词，且谓语动词为go,come等表示位置转移的动词时句子须倒装。
翻译：飞机飞高了。______________________________
翻译：主席进来了，会议开始了。________________ and the meeting began.
2) 当句首状语为表示地点的介词词组时，句子须倒装。
翻译： 一个身材高大的警察从拐角处走来。__________________________________
2. The world’s population has grown by six times what it was in 1800. (P22, Line 19)
【句式研习】倍数表达法
This box is four times as light as that box.
The cotton output was four times greater than that of 1996.
The Earth is 49 times the size of the Moon.
3. As a business development consultant, I’m often seen as being against the environment. (P23, Line 29)
【句式研习】本句中as 是______词，用来谈论________________________________.
As an interviewer, you ought to sit back and listen.
She spoke of him as her dearest friend.
比较：
As I left the house, I remembered my keys.
It is very difficult for us to know what to do, as we are not his parents.
I did as he asked.
Poor as he was, he was happy.
4. What I’m here to say is that having worked with many environmental consultants, I know that a healthy environment and development should be possible at the same time. （P23 Line34）
【句式研习】本句中what 引导一个________从句作__________,第一个that引导的______从句；在_______从句中，know后的that 引导了_______从句，而现在分词短语having worked with many environmental consultants作________状语。
5. The people operating these factories are deeply concerned about the environment. (P23, Line 37)
【句式研习】本句中operating these factories作________, 用来_________________，相当于一个________从句。
There is a piano standing （= which ________）in the corner.
A man respecting others (= who _______________) will himself be respected.
Can you see the star moving (=that _____________) in the sky?
6.Asking around, I find many people willing to pay a little higher prices for things that are friendly to the environment. （P22 Line51）
【句式研习】 本句中asking around 为现在分词短语作_______， willing to pay…things 为形容词短语作___________, that 引导________从句，修饰________,其中that 在______从句中作 _______。
反馈矫正
1. It’s here that the river f__________ down into the see.
2. The company is famous for the p__________ of small cars.
3. As we all know, he is g_________ for money.
4. It is his r_______ to make arrangements for the meeting.
5. Are you w________ that he should be admitted into our club?
6. He deserves c__________ for what he has done for the city.
7. He stated his b_________ that evolution occurred through natural selection.
8. I paid $1,000 in t________ last year.
9. I’ll c________ my teacher about the problem.
10. These fish are often eaten r_______.
迁移创新
1. The top leaders of the two countries are holding talks in a friendly __________.
A. atmosphere B. state C. situation D. phenomenon
2. Peter’s jacket looked just the same as Jack’s, but it cost ________ his.
A. as much twice as B. twice as much as
C. much as twice as D. as twice much as
3. I was just talking to Margaret when Jackson _________.
A. cut in B. cut down C. cut out D. cut up
4. It’s helpful to put children in a situation ______ they can see themselves differently.
A. that B. when C. which D. where
5. I would appreciate _____ if you come to my grandma’s birthday party and say “Hello” to her.
A. that B. it C. you D. one
6. - I’m still working on my project.
- Oh, you’ll miss the deadline. Time is ________.
A. running out B. going out C. giving out D. losing out
7. As these new products are not selling well, the members of the board have decided to _______production.
A. cut down B. cut down to C. cut back on D. cut off
8. ________ we move the picture over there? Do you think it will look better?
A. If only B. What if C. As if D. Even if
9. The grandfather, much to the surprise of the doctors, won’t want his granddaughter _____ this week.
A. to operate on B. operates C. to be operated on D. operating
10. He is easy to get along with. that, he is a determined boy. Which of the following is wrong?
A. In addition B. Besides C. In addition to D. Apart from
课前导学
1. cut back on 2. open the floor 3. raw material 4. use up
5. be concerned about 6. as/so long as 7. cut down 8. ask around
A D
引导梳理
1. 倒装 头重脚轻
After the banquet came a firework display in the square.
Up went the plane.
In came the chairman
Round the corner walked a tall policeman.
2. 结果 限制性定语从句 先行词chemicals ,定语，chemicals
3. 表语 定语，things 虚拟should+动词原形 虚拟 be punished help
4. 名词性 主语 表语 表语 宾语 原因
5. 状语 宾语补足语 定语 things 定语 主语
6. What if you fall sick?
What if she forgets to bring the book we need?
If I say I won’t go with you,so what?
What’s more
反馈矫正
1. flows 2. production 3. greedy 4. responsibility 5. willing
6.credit 7.belief 8. taxes 9. consult 10. raw
迁移创新
1-5 ABADB 6-10 AABCA
（小周）
A Taste of English Humor
单元教学目标
Talk about different types of humor；a taste of English humor
Learn how to express one’s emotions
Learn the –ing form as the Predicative, Attributive and Object Complement
Learn to write humorous stories
目标语言
话题 Different types of humor; a taste of English humor
词汇 1. 四会词汇：
slide, skin, cruel, content, astonish, particular, entertain, entertaining, throughout,
homeless, worn-out, failure, overcome, difficulty, boil, fortunate, snowstorm, chew, bottom, mouthful, direct, star, outstanding, Switzerland, fortune, swing, pancake, mountainous, whisper, vast, sense
2. 词组：
be content with, badly off, pick out, cut off, star in, knock into
功能 情感 ( Emotion )
I enjoy this very much because… It surprises me that…
I laugh at that kind of thing because… I felt happy because…
This is fun because… I’m pleased we were both amused at…
How wonderful / surprising It’s amusing that…
语法 动词的-ing 形式作表语，定语和宾语补足语的用法
Their job is “panning for gold”.
That was the problem facing Charlie Chaplin.
Do you find it funny to see someone sliding on a banana skin?
课时分配
1st Period Reading
2nd Period Speaking
3rd Period Grammar
4th Period Listening
5th Period Writing
6th Period Summary
分课时教案
The First Period
Teaching aims: Enable students to talk about some types of English humor and Chinese humor.
Key points: Help students learn how to understand and enjoy English humors.
Difficult points: Help students know the differences between English and Chinese in humor.
Teaching aids: pictures
Teaching procedure:
Step 1: Lead-in
Show some pictures to students, let them talk about the pictures and then ask them what they think of the pictures, whether they are funny or not.
Questions: 1) Do you know who these comedians are? What makes them funny?
2) Do you know other comedians who are funny in the same way?
3) Have you seen any of these comedians or programmers? What do you think of them?
Step 2: Warming up
Task 1. Brain-storming
Ask students to name some types of humors they know. Write those they are not familiar with on the blackboard, then show some pictures and summarize.
Types of humor Example of English humor Chinese humor
Nonverbal Charlie Chaplin Pantomimes（哑剧）刘全和，刘全利
Mime and farce Mr. Bean Funny plays 陈佩斯，赵本山
Verbal jokes Play on words, usually Cross talk 马季， 姜昆
Funny stories Two lines Jokes
Funny poems Edward Lear Doggerel（打油诗）
Task 2. Talking
Ask students to talk about some funny stories, any English or Chinese humors they know.
Task 3. Reading on P22
The purpose of the reading is to introduce the kind of verbal jokes. They use a “play on words” to be funny. Let students read the three jokes and then match the joke with the explanation. Then check the answer. After that, teacher can show some other jokes on the screen.
Joke 1:
Patient: Doctor, I’ve lost my memory.
Doctor: When did this happen?
Patient: When did what happen?
Joke 2:
Garcia: Thank you doctor. My fever is gone.
Doctor: Don’t thank me. Thank God.
Garcia: Then I will pay the fees to God.
Step 3 Homework
Ask each student to give a joke and present it in class next period.
The Second Period Reading
Teaching aims: Enable students to learn what humor means and what is nonverbal humor.
Key points: Help students divide the text into several parts according to the meaning.
Difficult points: Divide the paragraphs and give the main ideas.
Teaching aids: A recorder and a projector
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: ask students to present their jokes in class.
Step 2. Pre-reading
Questions: (1) What do you like to laugh at?
(2 ) What does humor mean? Is humor always kind?
Give students some time to discuss. The purpose is to help students know that different people have different taste about humor. It is difficult to say which one is better or which one is worse.
Step 3. Reading
The purpose of this reading is to introduce nonverbal humor. This reading material takes Charlie Chaplin for example. It tells us what nonverbal humor means; what is Charlie Chaplin’s style of acting; how he made a sad situation entertaining and so on.
Task 1. Divide the text into several parts according to the meaning.
Part One: the first and the second paragraph
Part Two: the third and the fourth paragraph
Part Three: the last paragraph
Task 2. Give the main idea of each part
The main idea of part one: It tells us that there are two kinds of humor. One is bad, while the other can inspire people.
The main idea of part two: It tells us something about Charlie Chaplin’s acting style and how Charlie Chaplin made a sad situation entertaining.
The main idea of part three: it gives us a short biography about Charlie Chaplin.
Task 3. Discussion
Let students have a discussion about the text, then answer some questions.
Questions: (1) What is behind fun?
(2 ) Why did people like Little Tramp?
(3 ) Do you think Charlie Chaplin’s eating boiled shoes funny? Why?
Step 4 Language points
1. content (adj.): satisfied, happy, not wanting any more
phrases: content with sth; content to do sth
e.g. (1) She is quite content to stay at home looking after her children.
(2 ) Are you content with your present salary?
Content (n.): that which is contained in sth
e.g. I like the style of her writing but I don’t like the content.
2. inspire sb. ( with sth.) inspire sth. (in sb.): To fill sb. with thoughts, feelings or aims.
e.g. His speech inspired us with hope.
3. badly off: in a poor position, esp. financially
The opposite is “ well off”
e.g. (1) They are too badly off to have a holiday.
(2 ) In fact most people are better off than they were five years ago.
Step 5 Practice
Finish the exercises on page 18, 19, it is a good time to consolidate the whole content of the text and the useful words and expressions from the text. It is easy for most students to finish. So leave students several minutes to finish and check the answers by showing them on the screen.
Step 6 Homework
Preview grammar by finishing Exercises 3, 4 on page 20, all the exercises on page 21.
The Third Period Grammar
Teaching aims: Enable students to learn how to use the –ing form as the attribute, the object complement and the predicative.
Key points: Let students know the structures of the sentences with the –ing form
Difficult points: Help students to tell the –ing form as the predicative and the use of the present continuous tense.
Teaching aids: A computer
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: the exercises on page 20 and 21.
Step 2. Word formation
Suffix Example
-able valuable lovable comfortable
-ing amusing misleading neighboring
-ful hopeful cheerful useful
-less endless homeless harmless
-ed excited interested moved
-ish Irish childish selfish
-ive active attractive expensive
-ate fortunate affectionate passionate
-ant important pleasant ignorant
-ly friendly orderly costly
There are ten suffixes in the chart. And there are some new words in it. But the purpose of showing this chart is to let students learn more about the adjective suffix.
Step 3. Discovering useful structures
Task 1. Revision
Have a revision about the –ing form used as the subject and object. Give students some sentences to translate:
(1) Talking to him is useless.
(2) Smoking does harm to your health.
(3) Walking is my sole exercise.
(4) Collecting stamps is my hobby.
(5) I suggested bringing the meeting to an end.
(6) He admitted taking the money.
(7) I couldn’t help laughing.
(8) Your coat needs washing.
Task 2. New usage of the –ing form
Ask students to look at the Exercises 4 on page 20. And then wake in pairs to finish the exercises.
Teacher checks the answers and give the explanations.
(1) A cooking pot: A pot that is used for cooking.
(2) A drinking horse: A horse that is drinking water.
(3) The man sitting on the sofa is a friend of my brother’s.
Here the –ing form are used as attribute.
(4) I saw the man sliding on a banner skin yesterday.
(5) Did you notice the man picking up that broken bottle and putting it in his bag?
Hear the –ing form are used as object complement The structure of the sentence with an object complement is:
Subject + Predicate + Object + Object complement
(6) Her job is looking after babies.
(7) What he likes is playing chess after supper.
Here the –ing form are used as predictive. Pay attention to the differences between –ing form used as predicative and present continuous tense.
(1) Her hobby is painting.
(2) Her favorite sport is skiing.
(3) This was very disappointing.
(4) The test results are very discouraging.
(5) She was very pleasing in her appearance.
(6) His concern for his mother is very touching.
(7) The photograph is missing.
(8) The article was misleading, and the newspaper has apologized.
In the first two sentences, the –ing form is used to show the character of the subject. In the next four sentences the words of the –ing form are all about the feelings. In the last two sentences, the words of the –ing form show some states and qualities.
(9) It is snowing hard.
(10) She is teaching in a night school.
In these two sentences, the –ing form are used as the predicate in the present continuous tense.
Step 4. Using Structures
Turn to page 56. Look at the Using Structure. There are two exercises in this part. Exercise 1 is to let students correct some errors in the sentences. This is not an easy job for most students, because it needs other knowledge, besides what the students learned today. So better leave them more time to do this exercise. For exercise 2, let students finish it in a short time. With the help of the pictures, students can easily understand the meaning and correctly use the –ing form to finish the blanks. Teacher can check the answers in class.
Step 4. Homework
Finish all exercises on page 56.
The Fourth Period Listening
Teaching aims: Enable students to understand the humor in the listening material.
Key points: Train the students to get the key wards by reading the questions before listening.
Difficult points: Get the main idea from the listening materials while listening.
Teaching aids: A recorder
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: (1) Ask a couple of students to tell their jokes in class.
(2 ) Ask some students to come to the blackboard to write their translation. After they have finished, teacher correct some errors with the whole class.
Step 2. Listening ( page 23 )
This is a funny story. Mary made some plum jam and left some in the pan. Five days later, her husband came home and poured the jam into the chicken. Later Mary came home and found all of her chickens were behaving strangely. What had happened? Give students two chances to listen to the story. First, go through Exercise1 and 2 to know what are the things they will do while listening. After that teacher plays the tape for them to finish Exercise 1. The second listening is to check the answers. For Exercise 2, teacher should leave some time for students to discuss the question.
Questions: (1) Did you find this story funny? Give the reason.
(2 ) What do you think of John’s behavior?
Step 2. Listening ( page 55 )
This is a story about a thief and a man. The situation is very interesting. Before listening, ask students what they would do if they find a thief in their home one day; whether they will be afraid of the thief and so on.
There are three steps for this listening. At first let students read the questions to make sure that they know what they should do in this listening. Next, play the tape for the first time to let students finish Exercise 1. Then play the tape again and let the students finish the questions in Exercise 2. After that, let the students check their answers with each other. At last, listen to the tape again, teacher can make a pause where there is an question to the question, in this way students can check all the answers.
Step 3. Listening ( page 58 )
There are four exercises in this listening. The first one requests students to get the general idea of the material. The second one is to ask the students to know some details of the material. The third one is a question that asks the students to speculate the teacher’s feeling. And the last one is a good exercise, it gives the students another chance to practice their oral English.
Step 4. Homework
Collect as many funny stories as possible, do some preparations for the writing in the next period.
The Fifth Period Writing
Teaching aims: Help the students learn how to write funny stories using the target language and according to the writing steps.
Key points: Teach students to write according to the writing of the writing steps.
Difficult points: Help students make up a dialogue, using the target language.
Teaching aid: A projector
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: Ask several students to read their funny stories in class.
Step 2. Writing ( page 23 )
Give students some instructions on writing a funny story.
1) Writing down your story in a logical order.
2) For each of your story try to find the most interesting words you can to describe how you felt or what was happing.
3) Then write out your story using these interesting words.
4) Read through your story.
5) Then show it to your partner. Let him/ her suggest some new and exciting words.
6) Write out the story and put it into a class collection of stories.
Give students enough time to finish the task and give them enough help in the writing. Tell them to give the outline first, then finish the story.
Step 3. Talking
Task 1. Show students some pictures. Ask them to describe the pictures and explain what is happening, whether it is funny or not.
Task 2. Imagine you want to play a trick on someone, maybe an April Fool’s trick. Work with partners, think up a funny thing and share it with the class.
Step 4. Speaking and writing task
This is a chance for students to learn limericks. It has only five lines. Three of them are longer than the other two. The longer lines all rhyme with each other and the shorter ones rhyme with each other. When introducing the poems, teacher read them first, and let the students enjoy the beauty of the rhyme. And at the same time point out that there must be two sets of rhyming words in the same poem, so the students can grasp the main feature of the poem.
After reading, ask students to tell the rhyme of the first and the second poem. Let students read the poems several times and feel it. Find more limericks for students to enjoy.
Give students some instructions on how to write a poem, let them think of rhyming words before writing. They need two sets of rhyming words.
Step 5. Homework
1) Finish Exercise 5 on Page 20.
2) Make a summary about what has been learnt in this unit.
The Six Period Summary
Teaching aims: 1) Learn to express the sentences that are connected with the positive and negative view of the same thing. 2) Make a summary about what has been learnt in this unit.
Key points: Sum up what we have learnt in this unit.
Difficult points: Sum up what we have learnt in this unit.
Teaching aids: A projector
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Check homework: Ask students to present their dialogue in class.
Step 2. Reading
This reading task gives us another joke. The title is “An April fool’s joke: The Noodle Harvest”. Ask students to read the sentence : “A fool sees not the same tree that a wise man sees.” After reading, explain the meaning of the sentence. (The meaning is that the thing is the same, but the way to treat it is different between a fool and a wise man.)
Give students some time to read the passage, then answer some questions and retell the whole story.
Questions: 1) What do children usually do on April Fool’s Day?
2) Why did people believe the programme Panorama?
3) Do you think the advice that the BBC gave people who asked how to grow noodle trees was serious? Give a reason..
4) What would you do to find out whether a story like this was true?
Step 3. Project
Ask students to make their own collection of jokes, funny poems or short stories. They can be the ones that they enjoy in the books that they have read. Make sure they add either a joke, a funny poem or a funny short story of their own. Copy them into a book and display it in the class so that all your classmates can enjoy them.
Step 4. Summing up
This is a summary about what they have learned in the unit. Leave students some time to finish the frame. Then teacher give students a dictation about the useful words and expressions.
功能句式：
1. I enjoy this very much because….
2. I laugh at that kind of thing because…
3. This is fun because….
4. How wonderful / surprising！
5. It surprises me that…
6. I’m pleased we were both amused at…
7. I felt happy because…
8. It’s amusing that…
语法：
1. Word formation
2. The –ing form of the verb used as predicative, attribute and object complement.
重点句子：
1. Do you find it funny to see someone sliding on a banana skin, bumping into someone else round a Conner, or filling down a hole in the end.
2. Perhaps it makes us feel more content with our life…
3. He became famous for using a particular form of acting, including mime and farce.
4. But he was lived by all who watched the film for his determination in overcoming difficulties and being kind even when people were unkind to him.
5. Imagine you are hungry and all there is to eat is boiled shoe.
6. He solved it by using nonverbal humor.
7. Their job is “panning for gold”.
8. This was the problem facing Charlie Chaplin in one of his most famous films.
Translate the following sentences into Chinese and pay attention to the use of the –ing form.
1. The two comedians performing on the stage are from Liaoning Province.
2. Who is the girl walking by the river.
3. The children playing the violin will give a performance next week.
4. The man with sunglass standing near the car is a cross talk artist.
5. The old lady talking to the children is a famous musician.
6. I saw a group of policemen coming out of a green jeep and running to the building.
7. I saw a dog carrying a piece of meat entering your garden.
8. I heard her singing a beautiful song at the party last night.
9. I got frightened when I saw a man playing with a snake in the park.
10. There were some boys shouting and crying under my window, so I could not fall asleep.
Step 5. Check yourself
1. Do you find it difficult to understand English humor? Why?
2. What role do you thing humor plays in your life?
3. What language points have you learned in this unit?
4. How well have you done in the exercises on the –ing form?
5. Did you have any problems in understanding this unit? How did you solve them?
Step 6. Homework
Do some preparations for unit 4.
Unit 2 Working the land
I．单元教学目标
技能目标Skill Goals
Talk about agriculture: a pioneer in farming -Yuan Longping
Talk about organic farming & green food
How to write a brief summary
Try to consolidate how to express suggestions & advice
Master the usage of the -ing form as the subject and object
Learn how to design English posters
II． 目标语言
功
能
句
式 建议（ Suggestions & advice）
I would rather ...
If I have a choice I’d choose because ...
I don’t like ... because ...
You need to ...
I’d prefer ... because ...
May I suggest ...
It’s a great pity that ...
Let me suggest Leng Jianli because...
Should I/We ...?
Perhaps we should consider Leng Jianli because...
It’s better to ...
But what/how about ...
词
汇 1. 四会词汇
hunger, sunburn, struggle, super, output, expand, circulate, satisfied, equip, freedom, violin, motorcycle, grain, export, suitable, chemical, confuse, mineral, reduce, supply, bacteria, pest, level, whatever, summary, exchange, nutrition, certain
2. 认读词汇
hybrid, strain, sorghum, peanut, darken, organic, fertilizer, fertile, soybean
3. 词组
rid ... of, be satisfied with, lead a ... life, would rather, refer to, search for, thanks to, rather than, with the hope of ...
语
法 动词的 -ing 形式作主语和宾语的用法
（The -ing form as the subject & object）
a. Wishing for things, however, costs nothing.
b. His other hobbies include playing mah-jong,swimming and reading.
重 点 句 子 1. However, he cares little about spending the money on himself or leading a comfortable life. P10
2.His other hobbies include playing mah-jong, swimming and reading. P10
3. Wishing for things, however, costs nothing.P10
4. It also refers to crops growing with natural rather than chemical fertilizers. P13
5. Putting this in their fields, they argue, makes the soil ... P13
6. This is important because developing a healthy soil reduces diseases ...P13
7. However, using chemical fertilizers is a big problem. P13
8. Instead, organic farmers insist on changing crops every two or three years.P14
9. These put the minerals back into the soil, making it rich and healthy ...P14
10. ... make sure that what is left in the ground after harvesting becomes a ...P14
11. He advised farmers to clear weeds from the ground before planting crops. P52
12. He suggested changing crops in the field every year. P52
Ⅲ. 教材分析与教材重组
1． 教材分析
本单元的中心话题是“农业”， 学生通过讨论和阅读了解有关农业、农村和农作物种植的内容。让学生了解农业在整个人类生活中的重要性，了解农村生活，了解中国农民的生活现状，提高他们对农业的认识，并且帮助他们更深刻地理解农业科学家袁隆平的科学研究的价值。同时让学生了解organic farming 以及它对人们生活的重要性，进一步扩大学生的关于农业方面的词汇量，并通过写一则海报提高学生的写作水平。
1.1 WARMING-UP 通过提问有关农业、农村和农作物种植的内容，让学生谈谈自己对农村和农业劳动的认识或经验。教师可通过讨论让学生互相学习，相互交流经验以增加他们的农业知识。
1.2 PRE-READING 部分有两组问题。在第一组问题中，讨论大米在东亚和东南亚国家人民生活中的重要性；而第二组问题则提出世界部分地区所面临的饥饿问题。由此激发学生对世界的关注，培养学生的同情心。
1.3 READING 部分介绍中国著名的农业科学家袁隆平的生平和他的杂交水稻。第一段描述了袁博士的外表--他更象一个农民而不象一个科学家，农村就是他做科研的殿堂。他的科研成果就是超级杂交水稻。 第二段描述他的家庭出身，学业，献身水稻科研的原因及所取得的成就。第三段告诉我们袁博士过着跟普通人一样的生活却干着伟大的事业。即使在功成名就之后，他也淡泊名利, 有着无私奉献的高尚精神。
1.4 COMPREHENDING 部分设计了三个练习。第一个是判断练习，学生根据课文中理解和收集的信息做出判断，甚至通过讨论才能做出判断。第二个是词语理解题。第三个练习提出问题，要求学生在阅读课文后作出回答,以检验他们的理解力和训练他们的归纳总结能力。
1.5 LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE 部分学习本单元重点词汇和语法项目。词语学习部分采用给出词义而让学生从课文中找出与之匹配的词，然后用所找的词汇完成第二个练习中的短文，以及用课文中意义相近的词汇替换练习三句中划线部分。通过这三种练习帮助学生理解并能熟练应用课文中所学的词汇。语法部分通过从课文中找同义句引出动词的-ing 形式，教师此时可引导学生找出其他的句子，以启发学生理解-ing形式的句法功能。练习二通过模仿例句，用-ing形式做主语代替动词不定式改写句子。练习三要求学生连接短语造句，让学生学习ing形式作宾语的用法，并列举后面接动词-ing形式作宾语的动词。练习四则训练学生v-ing形式在实际生活中的应用能力。练习五则设计了一个游戏以丰富学生的想象力。
1.6 USING LANGUAGE 部分综合训练学生的听说读写能力。第一部分读写结合，学生先阅读文章，文章写的是 Organic Farming or green food,读完后要求学生写一个摘要。在此教师要首先强调写摘要时学生一定要抓住文章的主题并且运用所学的重要词语。听力部分通过回答问题来提高学生的理解能力和理解的正确性。Reading, speaking and writing 部分把读，说和写有机地结合在一起。假设你是一个“绿色食品” farmer，通过背景阅读，你要有充分的理由，利用所提供的句型，以对话的形式说服他人购买你的食品。最后为你的食品设计一个有说服力的广告。
1.7 SUMMING UP部分要求学生归纳总结本单元内容、词汇和语法结构三个方面。
1.8 LEARNING TIPS 部分对如何提高表达能力提出建议。
2. 教材重组
2．1 把Warming up 和Pre-reading 作为reading 的导入内容，将这三部分与Comprehending整合成一节阅读课。
2.2 将 Learning about Language on Page 11, USING STRUCTURES (P50)设计成一节词汇和语法课。
2.3 将 Using Language 中的 Reading 和 READING TASK in Workbook (P51) 还有USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS on P51设计成一节泛读课。
2.4 将Using Language 中的Listening（P14），LISTENING TASK（P50）和LISTENING（P48）设计成一节听力课。
2.5 将 Speaking and Writing（P15）和SPEAKING AND WRITING TASK（P53）及TALKING（P48）设计成一节写作课。
2.6将 SUMMING UP (P16), USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS (P49), PROJECT和CHECKING YOURSELF (P47) 设计成一节复习课。
3. 课型设计与课时分配 （经过教材分析，本单元可用五课时完成。）
1st period Reading
2nd period Words and grammar
3rd period Reading
4th period Listening
5th period Writing
6th period Summary
Ⅳ. 分课时教案
The First Period Reading
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target Language 目标语言
a. 词汇和短语
sunburn, struggle, super, expand, circulate, equip, export, rid ... of, be satisfied with, lead a ... life, search for, would rather, thanks to, with the hope of, rather than
b. 重点句子
This special strain of rice makes it possible to produce one-third more of the crop in the same fields. P10
He cares little about spending the money on himself or leading a comfortable life. P10
He also doesn’t care about being famous. P10
He feels it gives him less freedom to do his research. P10
His other hobbies include playing mah-jong, swimming and reading. P10
Wishing for things, however, costs nothing. P10
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Enable Ss to learn more about agriculture, countryside and farming. By talking they can exchange their experience with each other. By reading they will realize the role that agriculture plays in human life. In fact this world faces a serious problem-starvation. So after reading the passage about Dr Yuan students will know the importance of his achievement to man. Of course they will learn from Dr Yuan some noble character.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Help Ss learn how to describe Dr Yuan Longping including his personality.
Teaching important points 教学重点
a. Help to comprehend the text and grasp the main idea of the text.
b. Grasp the usage of some words and expressions.
c. How to help students make up their minds to make contributions to motherland in the future like Dr Yuan.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
a. How to help students learn more about agriculture.
b. Help students really master the usage of words and expressions.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Talking, questioning-and-answering activity and reading.
Teaching aids 教具准备
A tape recorder, a projector and a computer.
Teaching procedures && ways 教学过程与方式
Step Ⅰ Greeting and leading in
T: Hello, everyone.
Ss: Hello, teacher.
T: In last unit we learnt some great women. Today we’ll learn a famous man. Who will it be? At first let’s look at the two pictures on Page 9. What are the people doing?
Ss: They are planting rice.
T: Can you tell me something about rice?
S: Rice grows in the south.
S: But in some place of the north we can also find rice.
T: Yeah. You are right. In fact rice is a cereal grain that has been grown for at least 5,000 years and is eaten by 2.4 billion people everyday throughout the world. In Australia, farmers have had to struggle with their harsh environment to grow rice.
Ss: Really?
Step Ⅱ Warming up
T: Have you ever grown any plants? If so, what did you do to grow them? If not, what kind of plant would you like to grow? How will you grow it?
S: I have ever grown corn and potatoes. In autumn, my father and I ploughed the soil deep for the first time, then in the next spring, we ploughed the soil for a second time, this time I put the corn seeds into the tunnel following my father. Finally my father covered the corn seeds by ploughing again.
S: I never grow any plant. I’d like to plant sunflowers. They look beautiful. They always face the sun when they are young. I dig some holes in my garden, put some sunflower seeds in them, water them and finally cover them with some more soil.
T: Very well. Have you ever been to the countryside? What did you do there?
S5: Yes, I went there to see my grandfather. In the village I played with other boys in the little stream and caught little fish. I even helped my grandfather get in the corn by cutting the corn stems, which made me tired.
T: Are you from a farmer’s family? What do you know about farming?
S: Yes, my father is a farmer. In my view, farming is hard work. People have to plant crops, smooth away weeds and get in the crops at the right time. They have to get up early to work in the field so as to protect themselves from the sunshine.
T: That’s right. In the north, the biggest worry that farmers have is the drought. When it doesn’t rain, and they can’t irrigate the crops, the crops will die and they will have nothing after hard working.
Step Ⅲ Pre-reading
The purpose of this step is to let students know the importance of rice. By answering the two questions, students can easily understand why we call Dr Yuan Longping a pioneer for all people, and why he devotes all his life to the rice research.
T: Food is the basic need for man. Rice is a main food in all Eastern Asian and Southeastern Asian countries. It is said that there are 2.4 billion people to eat rice everyday throughout the world. What do you think would happen if tomorrow there was suddenly no rice to eat?
S: I think if that happened, people there would suffer from starvation. They would be panic and the whole country would get into trouble. Maybe the situation that human beings eat human beings will happen.
T: That’s too terrible. But this kind of thing once happened in history. Well, if you had the chance to do one thing to help end famine in the world, what would you do?
S: I would invent a new kind of plant to produce more food.
S: I’ll make a kind of fertilizer to give rice enough nutrition and let them grow quickly and have high product. But first without pollution to our environment.
T: A great idea! Your idea is just the same with Dr Yuan Longping. Do you know Yuan Longping?
S: I heard that he is an expert on agriculture.
T: Yeah, today we are going to read a passage about him. Let’s see how he helped the world to solve the problem- starvation. Please open your books to Page 9.
Step Ⅳ Fast Reading
The reading material is about an agricultural pioneer named Yuan Longping who worked hard at a new strain of rice. It has proved so successful that his technology spread into other countries. The purpose of fast reading is to let students find some useful information, and get familiar with the text. So in this step, teacher can design some questions for students, so that they can easily find the answers and finish the reading task.
T: Please scan the passage and find out the answers to the questions on the screen. Then I’d like to ask you to answer them.
Show the questions on the screen and give students three minutes to read the text quickly.
1. What does Dr Yuan look like?
2. What’s his achievement?
3. What do you think of him?
Three minutes later.
T: Now who’s the first volunteer to answer Question 1?
S: He has a sunburnt face and arms and a slim, strong body. He is more like a farmer than a scientist.
T: Good! What about his achievement?
S: He grows what is called super hybrid rice, which makes it possible to produce one-third more of the crop in the same fields. Thanks to his research, the UN is trying to rid the world of hunger. Using his hybrid rice farmers’ producing harvests twice as large as before.
T: What do you think of Dr Yuan?
S: It isn’t a quick question. I think Dr Yuan doesn’t like money. He gives millions of yuan to equip others for their research in agriculture. He doesn’t like fame too. Because he feels it gives him less freedom to do his research, and he would rather keep time for his hobbies. Besides, he is a man with colourful dreams. He wants to produce a kind of rice that could feed more people, and he can export his rice so that it can be grown all of the world.
T: I think that your eyes are like a scanning machine. You can find so many good points of Dr Yuan Longping in such a short time. That’s very good. But I can describe Dr Yuan in one word. Guess which word?
S: I don’t know.
T: Wise. In this world, many people warship material and fame. But just as you said Dr Yuan didn’t like money and fame. Because he knows he can’t own these things forever. All the money and fames are chains, which can trip a person’s happiness and freedom. So he is a wise man. Giving up all the fame and money means liberation. Here I’d like to praise him using a Chinese poem. That is “有如莲花出于水, 又如日月不住空。”. Don’t you agree with me?
Ss: Yes, we agree with you.
T: Thank you. Now let’s read the text again to find the main idea of the text. Doing this we can find how the writer designed the text. This can give us an idea to write an biography.
Step Ⅴ Careful Reading and Explanation
Give students 3 minutes to read and find the main idea of the text. While students are doing this, teacher can show the chart on the screen. After they have finished their task, ask them to look at the screen and fill in it.
T: Well. In last unit, we learn how to make a poster to tell everyone about a theme. Do you remember? Make a large heading, then make a smaller heading giving a little more information. Write down most of the information using the smallest size writing. Now, let’s practice it again. Look at the chart on the screen, in which I have written the large heading of each paragraph. What you should do is to fill in the smaller headings to finish the poster. Now, let’s begin. You may work in pairs to have a discussion to see what you should fill in. Should I give you some suggestions to finish this task?
Ss: Yes.
T: OK, 5 minutes is enough, I think.
Show the chart on the screen:
A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
1. He wants everyone to call him a farmer.
2. His biography.
3. His personality.
4. His dreams.
Five minutes later, teacher can ask some of them to fulfil the chart. They can use words, phrases, or sentences to do this. Here is a sample for teacher to refer to.
A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
1. He wants everyone to call him a farmer.
1) A scientist works the land.
2) Sunburnt face and arms, slim, strong body.
3) Grow hybrid rice.
4) The first agricultural pioneer.
2. His biography.
1) In 1931, born.
2) In 1953, graduated and devoted his life to finding ways to grow rice.
3) Last year, twenty billion tons of rice was produced. Now, Dr Yuan is circulating his knowledge.
3. His personality.
He is satisfied with his life. Because he doesn’t like
money and fame.
4. His dreams.
1) The first dream.
2) The second dream.
T: Wonderful! I believe that you have mastered the way to write a biography. Now do you have any trouble in understanding the sentences? Please go ahead.
S1: Yes, I don’t understand the sentence “... for that’s how he regards himself”.
S2: Can you explain the sentence “... has more, rather than fewer troubles.”?
T: OK, the phrase, “how he regards himself”, means how he thinks of himself. It refers to a person’s self-image; while“... has more, rather than fewer troubles” means that you expect fewer troubles but in fact you get more than you thought you would.
T: Now please look at the screen. Here are some explanations about the boldface words in our text. Copy the English explanation of these words and read the examples.
Show the following points on the screen.
1. struggle v to make great efforts
e.g. They have struggled for years to free their country from the enemy.
I’m struggling to finish the huge helping you gave me.
2. sunburnt adj sun-tanned
e.g. His sunburnt skin looks healthy.
3. super adj (infml) excellent; splendid
e.g. You’ll like her, she’s super.
You look super in your new clothes.
It was super of you to help.
4. expand v
(cause sth to) become greater in size, number or importance
e.g. Metals expand when they are heated.
Why not try to expand your story into a novel?
5. circulate v
(cause sth to ) pass from one person, place, etc to another
e.g. People who circulate false news are to be blamed.
Yet reports of this kind have been circulated by our newspapers.
The news of the enemy’s defeat quickly circulated round the town.
6. equip v
supply sb/sth (with what is needed, for a particular purpose)
e.g. Now all fishing boats are radio-equipped.
They can’t afford to equip their army properly.
Please equip yourself with a sharp pencil and a rubber for the exam.
7. export v
send (goods) to another country for sale
e.g. India exports tea and cotton to many different countries.
This company has a large home market but doesn’t export.
8. rid ... of make sb/ sth free from (sb/ sth unpleasant)
e.g. We all wish that we would rid the world of famine.
The farmer recently tried to rid the house of rats.
9. lead ... a life, live ... a life
e.g. Now we are leading a happy life.
In the old days farmers led a terrible life in the country.
10. be satisfied with, be content with
e.g. The young lady isn’t satisfied with the peaceful life.
Are you satisfied with his answers?
11. would rather, prefer to
e.g. I’d rather walk than take a bus.
I’d rather you knew that now, than afterwards.
Step Ⅵ Listening and Post-reading
At first, let students listen to the tape, and then finish the exercise in Comprehending. In Step Ⅳ and Ⅴ, we have involved some questions in Exercise 3, so teacher can choose some questions to do. For Ex 1 and 2, teacher can leave some time for students to finish and then check the answers with the whole class.
Step Ⅶ Summary and Homework
T: Today we talked about agriculture. And we also read about Dr Yuan Longping. We have known much about the great scientist. Of course we have learned some words and expressions about farming. Please try to grasp these words and expressions after class. Now please look at the poem on the screen:
Farmers weeding at noon,
Sweat down the field soon.
Who knows food on a tray,
Due to their toiling day?
T: Do you know it? Read it and say what does it mean?
Ss: Of course. It’s 悯农 written by Li Shen.
T: Right. The title is A HARD - WORKING FARMER. This is my gift to you. Please read it together. OK, hope you can remember it when you are having your dinners. Besides, I’d like you to think: even if Dr Yuan’s dreams come true, can this really solve the starvation? Why? This is the homework. Think it over. Next time I’ll ask some of you to give your opinion in the class. Another one is to finish the exercises in Learning about Language. Exercise 1, 2 and 3 are about useful words and expressions. Finish them. Next time we’ll check the answers. Ok, class is over. See you next time.
附件:
课文复述
Retell the text in about 150 words.
Notes:
1. Use the first person to retell the story.
2. Try to use the proper conjunctions.
3. Refer to the chart while retelling.
4. The possible version below can be used as a material for both retelling and dictation.
One possible version:
I’m Yuan Longping. Look at my sunburnt face and arms and my slim, strong body and you will think I’m more like a farmer than a scientist. In fact I have struggled for the past five decades to help farmers. In 1974, I began to grow a so-called super hybrid rice. This special strain of rice makes it possible to produce one-third more of the crop in the same fields.
I was born into a poor farmer’s family in 1931. When I was young, I saw many people go hungry often. So I have devoted myself to finding ways to increasing rice harvest without expanding the area of fields since I graduated from Southwest Agriculture College in 1953. Now more than 60 % of the rice produced in China each year is from this hybrid strain. I am circulating this knowledge in India, Vietnam and other less developed countries to increase their harvest. Perhaps you think I am rich. Actually I live a simple life. I care little for money. In my opinion a person with too much money will have more troubles. I don’t want to be famous because I prefer to have more time to do my research. In my free time I love listening to music, playing mah-jong and reading. I once had a dream, in which I saw rice plants as tall as sorghum and each ear of rice was as big as an ear of corn and each grain of rice was as huge as a peanut. Now I have another dream-to export my rice so that it can be grown all over the world.
详细内容请订阅
《名师说课》
Phrases for unit 1 Module 1
Unit 1 School life 35.the best way to do / of doing sth
1.tell the differences between…and 36.achieve high grades/ success
2.know of / about sb/sth 37.a bit challenge
3.(be) at ease with 38.at first
4.be happy with sb / sth 39.spend… (in) doing
5.on (the ) average 40.at the end of this month
6.used to do sth 41.miss doing
7.be used to doing sth 42.as well (as )
8.for free 43.word by word
9.such as 44.at the beginning of …
10.encourage sb to do sth 45.according to…
11.introduce A to B 46.first of all
12.pass sth on (to ) sb. 47.do like eating desserts
13.be available for 48.think of
14.(be) far ( away) from 49.learn about
15.make sure that…. 50.the quickest way to get to the canteen
16.graduate from 51.go straight on
17.upon/on doing 52.be late for…
18.surf the internet 53.get/be/become interested in
19.donate sth to sb 54.develop an interest in
20.forget to do sth 55.miss the chance to do sth
21.forget doing sth 56.instead of (doing) sth
22.inform sb of sth 57.pay attention to
23.prepare for 58.as… as possible
24.make preparations for 59.finish doing
25.in preparation for 60.compare …with
26.do… for preparation 61.regret to do
27.be responsible for 62.regret doing
28.be made up of 63.songs sung by the students
29.consist of 64.stop to do / doing
30.come up with 65.read …out aloud
31.mean to do 66.have something done
32.mean doing
33.than usual / as usual
34.attend assembly
Unit 2 Module 1
36.keep … in mind
1.turn up 37.get … tidied up
2.force sb to do sth 38.clean …up
3.an unpleasant experience 39.either…or
4.can’t wait to do… 40.not…. at all
5. be supposed to do 41.ask for sth
6.be gong/ missing /lost 42.at the moment
7.do with… 43.refuse to do …
8. deal with 44.insist on doing
9.leave sb in charge 45. be to do …
10. be in charge of 46.at present
11.act like an adult 47.prevent doing
12.expect sth from sb 48. prevent … from doing
13.go unpunished 49.allow sb to do…
14.go out 50.keep doing
15.have sth done 51.help …with
16.not … any more 52.shout at
17.deserve to do 53.like crazy
18.be hard on… 54.every time
19.be rude to … 55 forbid …from doing
20.be different from… 56. search for
21. than ever (before ) 57.waste .. doing
22.make sb do 58.invite sb to do…
23.even if 59.now that…
24.without being punished 60.feel like doing
25. should have done 61.in the form of…
26.explain to sb sth/ that… 62.suggest doing
27.on one’s holiday / vocation
28.argue about sth with sb
29. a little bit expensive
30. be proud of
31.stay up
32.after all
33.mix…up with…
34.in fact
35.keep doing
Unit 3 Module 1
1.by doing …
2.keep sb doing…
3.cause sb to do ….
4.hear from
5.for weeks
6.three times a week
7.work out
8.stay slim
9.be ashamed of…
10.lose weight
11.keep doing
12.regret doing
13.follow sb’s advice
14.be amazed about
15.go on diets
16.learn from
17.in secret
18.keep fit
19.side effect
20.unlike what Jeff said
21.by the way
22. join sb in sth
23.help do …
24.be surprised to do…
25.prepare sb for…
26. as a matter of fact
27.in no time
28.along with
29.come cross
30.in the long term
31.give out
32.be dying for sth/ to do sth
Unit 1 Module 2
page 1 Page 7.
1. a sunken ship 31. dream of
2,run into 32.come true
3. reason for building the pyramids 33 separate…from…
4. believe in 34..take off
page 2 Page 11
5.step up 35.so far
6. search for 36.get…done
7.go missing page 18---19
9.due to 37.be said to be hairy
10.because of 38.run after
11.stay out late 39.on average
12.show up=turn up 40.footprints made by men
13.the next day /next day 41.cause ...to do
14.in fact 42.could have done
15. did return home 43.become convinced
16.see/hear/… doing/do 44.make one’s way to…
17.go straight home 45.have the chance to …
18.put on Sentences’ structures:
19.according to… 1.Mr Foster was surprised that his son did not
20.outside the window tell anyone that he was staying out late.
Page 3 2. However, police found that Justin did in fact
21.full moon return home on Friday night .
22. strange looking creatures with large black eyes 3.Witnesses also say they saw Justin walking towards his home at 10.45 p.m.
23.so that/ so …that…
24.do research on
25.rule out
26.look into
27.make up
28.take charge of=be in charge of/ in the charge of
29.look at…
30.give up
Unit 2 Module 2
p 22 -23 an animal to sit on make a fire
be busy doing… lose one’s way
spend… (in) doing run out
be ready to do… a piece of equipment
on camels/ by camel when needed
be the size of … P 28 over a period of time
sleeping bags p 31 be disappointed at…
so that (conj) in total silence
on clear nights (prep) at dawn
in the dark (prep) p33 look out for …
in case (conj.) at the foot of…
in case of …(prep) p35 up to $ 2,000
in that case (prep) in total
turn upside down P 38
get turned join together
including cows’ blood reach to the sky
close to…. stay young
as …as possible be covered with…
worry about…. feed on…
refer to…. in harmony with
p 25 can’t wait to do… provide …with…
sound like…
look forward to doing…
be worth doing…
P 27 as well
1. I’ll bring a torch with me so that I’ll be able to see in the dark.
2. You have to wear special clothing just in case your raft gets turned upside down or sinks.
3. We’ll try to get as close as possible to the animals, even though they’re dangerous.
4. The weather report says that it will be raining when we arrive in London.
5. As you can see, my schedule for June is full and I cannot go to London for the festival.
6. Lakes , surrounded by vast grasslands, look like jewels.
Unit 3 Module 2
p 41 within seven years
of all time have something/nothing to do with…
have an effect on… at the age of
p42 result in/ result from
during one’s lifetime in advance
teach sb to do … based on…/ base…on
be curious about p 45
at the age of … pay off/ back/for…
set sail (for….) make a great contribution to…
search for later on
be known as… p50
a city called Luxor set foot on…
as well as /as well at full speed
by the 1920s pay (little/ much ) attention to…
right away P58
upon doing… in orbit
fall ill not only….but also
lead …to / lead to win somebody something
P45 in control
fall ill with a fever be proud of
at the moment of… look up to …
hear of… manage to do...
the following day
die of…
shortly after….
Sentences :
p42.By the time we left, it was empty.
Upon entering the tomb, Carter’s lucky pet bird was eaten by a snake.
p43 If breathed in, the viruses can result in illness or even death.
What is certain, though, is that the mystery of Tutankhamun’s tomb has never been fully explained.
P58 Born in 1965, Yang Liwei has wanted to fly since he was young boy.
The team spent the next five years being trained.
It was his high scores on the psychological tests that finally won him his position as China’s first astronaut.
Unit 3 Module 3
be known as
take over
continue to do…
turn to …
be covered with/by
a pair of binoculars
be off to …
by the time…
together with….
prevent …from….
be involved in…
brush away
prepare oneself to do…
in good condition
carry out
lead to…
on board
in memory of….
be in use
in return for….
once again
no more
in the following hundred years
arrange for…
go on a cultural expedition to….
run through
refer to….
pay attention to…
have the chance to do/ of doing….
throughout the world
focus on….
in history
Unit 1 Module 3
page 2-3 that far lose sight of…
glance at continue doing
in sight sweat with fear
set off all of a sudden
by the time ring out
feel a rough hand brush her face page 16---17 work out a plan
feel here heart beating with fear be used to do …
wish for according to…
hold her still a chair to sit on
reach out ( for …) fall asleep
stare (up) at look up (at …)
rest on … bang into
watch out (for…) in a beautiful dress
be off offer sb sth
a fog this bad page 18 mainly because
pay back the chance of being attacked by a shark
get across the road feed on..
except in a fog like this be known as
have … in common find out
page 5 follow one’s advice be fit to do…
weather that bad the latter type of attacks
be frozen with be likely to do…
believe in over a long distance
page 6 go hungry be attracted to sth
page 9 be related to… the following tips
be linked to… hit… on the nose
a question to be answered stick sb in the eye
page 11 have something/nothing to do with..
overall health as well sign language even if
make the most of at lunchtime sleep deeply manage to do..
rather than +V in the distance be grateful to…
make one’s way to… in the near future
can’t help doing/do 名词性从句：主语从句 宾语从句
warm ..up 表语从句 同位语从句
get close to
Unit 2 Module 3
p 22-23 throughout history due to…
so many confusing rules differ from
be made up of as a whole
a language called Celtic turn into
mix…with… combine …and/with …
be different from
consist of…
pick up
lift up
contribute to…
take control of…
despite the fact
have an impact on…
result in..
by the latter half of the 14th century
mother tongue
because of…
continue doing…
P 24 take the place of…
p 25 depend on…
p26.a lauge number /amount of…
in addition
take my concerns into consideration
have a word with…
right away
sort out
p 28-29 dream of…
come tre
look up the word
a waste of…
what if.
keep changing
disagree about sth
agree with sb
care about…
keep their language pure
Unit 1 Module 4
page 1. be aware of, be tired of…
be similar to... be available to….
Project Hope on sale
page 2 encourage sb to do.. be popular with…
be used to +N/Ving ( V) of high quality/ importance/help..
in a day p 8 the following day
do research on… the previous day
share sth with sb over and over (again)
believe in an idea p 13 consider doing
for free be attractive to sb
be intended to do… p 16 regret not having done…
protect ….from…. up to 6 hours
even if/ even though be bored with….
be proud of… Page 18
connect ….to…. get sb to do…
fall for …. be concerned with
play tricks on … care about
the public get …across
be meant to do…. depend on…
lead better lives appeal to
Knowledge changes life
deal with….
live healthy lives
Smoking is committing suicide slowly
follow the advice
be smart about….
be supposed to do…
warn...against…
page 5 offer sb sth
be satisfied with…
trick….into…
take drugs
keep away from….
persuade sb into doing….
page 6 at low price
Unit 2 Module 4
save time for 词汇拓展
in honour of honour n adj adv
from around the world delight n adj adv
come to one’s attention significance n adj
under the name of brief adj adv
recognize …as… athlete n adj adv
get sth doing marry v adj n
be designed to… compete v n adj
come up with peace n adj adv
look out for contribute v n
enter…into… absence n adj
be of great use excite v n adj
call an ambulance Asia n adj
meet the requirements move v n
(keep …)under control glory n adj
make way for attract v n adj
hope for orgin n adj adv
take part in act v adj adv n
side by side require v n
break the record practise v n
make contributions to associate v n
play a role in support v n
be popular with… involve v adj n
at least
plenty of
no matter wh-…
be delighted to do
look forward to doing
hope for + N
every two years
compete for…
the opening ceremony
across the world
realize one’s dream
Unit 3 Module 4
come true end in failure
virtual reality make money
not only…but aslo P 49
pass on at the moment
thousands of last but not least
be connected to on display
give out throughout the week
put forward P 51
depend on set up
last but the not least concertrate on
set up be bored with
be accused of…. accuse …of be disappointed at /by
close down be impressed at/by/with
concentrate on be situated in/ on
in my opinion be surprised at/by
come across P 53
instead of at one time
P 42---43 in my opinion
pass on in worse condition
be connected to P 59
thousands of come across
give out tell of…
add to… recognize …as
upon doing… at a speed of…
not only …but also with the help of….
provide …with…
play the role of ….
put forward
in reality
bring…alive
P 45
take the risk of….
P 46
make a profit
Pre-reading
1. What is the purpose of language?
2. What do you think “Body language” means?
3. How can you tell if someone is sad even if they do not speak?
Reading
Task1: Answer the questions on P26 to P27
Task2: Fill in the blank.
Country / Area Ways to greet each
Britain Shake hands. Do not stand very close to others or touch strangers as soon as they meet.
Canada Shake hands.
Japan Bow.
Spain、Italy、South American countries Approach others closely and are more likely to touch them.
France Shake hands and kiss each other twice on each cheek
Middle East, some Muslim countries Shake hands and stand quite close to other men. Nods to women and do no shake hands with them.
Language points
Reading
1，They will be meeting at a major hotel with local business people and people who represent the Chinese government.
will be meeting “将要会见”
will / shall be doing 表示“预料将要发生的动作”， 在现代英语口语中用得很多，口气往往比较婉转， 随便。
(1)你什么时候再来看望我们？
When will you be visiting us again?
(2)我就要去参加一个国际会议了。
I shall shortly be attending an international conference.
major
adj. more important, great(er) 较大的，较重要的，主要的
a major road 干路
这辆车需要大修。
The car needs major repairs.
vi. specialize in a certain subject( at college or university) 主修，专攻
major in 攻读，专修，主修
黛西是法语专业的。
Daisy is majoring in French.
n. 专业，陆军上校
local adj. 地方的，本地的， 地区的
当地的医生 the local doctor
本地新闻 the local news
这是头本地羊。 This is a local sheep.
represent vt.
1). 表现，描绘，描画
这幅画描绘了亚瑟法庭的一个场面。
This picture represents a scene at King Arthur’s court.
2) 代表，
秃鹰象征了美国。
The bald eagle represents the United States.
3) 想象 represent sth. to oneself 想象出某事物
2.Four people enter looking around in a curious way.
curious adj. eager to learn or know 富于好奇心的，有求知欲的，感兴趣的
be curious about 对……好奇
be curious to do 急于做
curiosity n. 好奇心 curiously adv. 好奇地
(1)她还是个小女孩儿时，就对人类的起源发生了兴趣。
As a girl, she was curious about the origin of human beings.
(2)The tourists were surrounded by the curious children.
游客被好奇的孩子们围起来了。
3. You do not want to disappoint your boss, and this is an exciting experience for you, so you stand watching and listening.
disappoint v. 使（某人）失望
disappointed adj. 失望的，失意的， 受挫的
disappointing adj. 令人失望的，扫兴的
(1)如果我考试不及格，我的父母会失望的。
My parents will be disappointed in me if I fail the exam.
(2)结果令我们所有人都很失望。
The result disappointed all of us.
(3)多么令人失望的消息啊。
What disappointing news!
(4)比赛输了，这令她很沮丧。
She was deeply disappointed about losing the game.
standing watching and listening V-ing形式作状语表伴随
4. Mr. Garcia approaches Ms. Smith, touches her shoulder and kisses her on the cheek.
approach ① n. (UC) 靠近，临近，接近
② n. (C) 通路，入口； 方法，步骤(method)
③ v. 靠近，走近
（1） We heard the approach of the train. (火车开过来了。)
（2） All approaches to the town （所有通往城镇的道路）are blocked.
（3） Do you know the best approach （最佳方法）to study a foreign language?
（4） He approached （靠近）the bird quietly.
5．These are examples of learned or cultural “body language”.
learned adj. having much knowledge acquired by study 有学问得，博学的
learned man 学者
他很有学问，但是非常自负。
He’s very learned but rather proud.
6. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching strangers or being too close or too far away.
1）not…nor… 既不。。。，又不。。。
nor 常置于句首、助动词或连系动词之前，表示 and also not. 此时也可以用neither 代替。
(1)我不喜欢这部电影，她也不喜欢。
I don’t like the film. Nor / Neither does she.
(2)我今天不去上班，梅西也不去。
I’m not going to work today and nor / neither is Maisie.
touching … or being … 都用作状语，相当于 while ( they are ) touching… or
2）nor are they 。。。 含有否定意义的副词或连词（如not ,seldom, little, hardly, never, rarely, nowhere等）放在句首时，需用倒装。
(1)他一个英语单词也不会说。
Not a single word of English can he speak.
(2)我从来没有见过他。
Never have I seen him before.
(3)Not for a moment ______what he said. B
A. I believed B. did I believe C. I would believe D. I believe
(4)No where else in the world ___ a place so beautiful. C
A. you can find B. find you C. can you find D. do you find
7. People from places like … and are more likely to touch them.
be likely to 很有可能，有希望。。。
possible , probable, likely
possible 表示可能的可能性不大，强调客观上有可能性，但也常常暗自“实际上希望很小”.常用于固定结构中，如：as…as possible, if possible, It is possible that…, It is possible for sb to do sth.
probable 表示可能性很大，主要用来指有根据，合情理，值得相信的事物，译为“很有可能地，大概” It is probable that…
likely 表示可能性很大，但比probable弱，侧重从表面看，某事很有可能发生，当指某人或某事充当主语，其后用不定式，只能用likely ，而不用possible ,probable,即，sb./sth.be likely to do. 句式：It is likely that…
(1) It’s nearly ten o’clock and father ____ walk in at any moment. C
A. is possible to B. is maybe to C. is likely to D. is able to
(2) Look, dark clouds are gathering. It is ____ to rain soon. C
A. probably B. possibly C. likely D. perhaps
(3) ___ there likely ___ anyone to meet us at the airport? D
A. Does, to be B. Is, being C. Has, that D. Is, to be
8. It is an interesting study and can help you avoid difficulty in communication.
avoid vt. 避开，躲避（某人/某事物）； 防止（某事）发生，预防
avoidable adj. 可避免的 avoidance n. 逃避，避开
avoid( driving in ) the center of city 避开市中心(行驶)
(1)做为一个驾驶新手，琳达尽力避免发生事故。
As a new driver, Linda tries her best to avoid accidents.
(2)I quickly walked to the other side of the road to avoid ___ him. C
A. to meet B. having met C. meeting D. to have met
Using language
1. Some body language is similar everywhere.
1) some 后面有时可跟可数名词的单数形式，意为“某种，某个”(a certain)
(1)他没通知我们就走了，他一定有他的理由。
He left without telling us. He must have some reason for this.
(2)你能给我推荐个旅馆吗？
Could you recommend me some hotel there?
2) be similar with 类似的，相像的
e.g. 玛丽的帽子和简的差不多。
Mary’s hat is similar with Jane’s.
2.A smile is the universal facial expression –it is intended to put people at ease.
facial expression 面部表情
intend v. 打算，想要，企图
intend to do/doing sth. 打算做……
intend sb. to do 打算让某人做
intend that = intend +n.+to do 打算做。。。
be intended for 为。。。而 。。。（表示目的）
be intended as 作为。。。
(1) He intends to study abroad (到国外留学)next year.
(2) He intended his son to manage （打算让他的儿子经营管理）the company.
(3) The movie is intended for （为。。。而。。。）adults only.
(4) It is intended as （作为）a joke.
ease n. 安心，安逸，容易，轻易； v.减轻，放松
at ease 舒适，不费力气 with ease （军队口令）稍息
put/ set sb. at (his) ease 使某人感到轻松自在
ease out （使）悄然离开 ease off （病）减轻，缓和，放松
ease one’s mind 心情舒畅 take one’s ease 使自己轻松一下，休息
(1) His words put me at ease. (使我感到轻松)
(2) He is at ease （放心）about the matter.
Ex.
1. _________dogs seldom bite. D
A. Bark B. To bark C. Barked D. Barking
2. To get here in time, they came ________ all the way. A
A. running B. run C. ran D. to run
3. He sat there ________, with his head on his hand. B
A. and think B. thinking C. thought D. being thought
4. The wolf spoke in a _______ voice and Mr Dongguo felt _____. A
A. frightening; frightened B. frightened, frightened
C. frighten, frightening C. frightening, frightening
5. They set out ______ for the ___boy. B
A. searching, losing B. searching, lost
C. to search, lost D. searched, losing
6. It’s a pleasure to watch the face of a ____ baby. C
A. asleep B. sleep C. sleeping D. slept
7. The student sat there, _________ what to do. D
A. doesn’t knowing B. didn’t knowing
C. not know D. not knowing
8. The secretary worked late into the night, __________ a long speech for the international conference. C
A. to prepare B. prepared C. preparing D. was preparing
9. European football is played in 80 countries, ____ it the most popular sport in the world. A
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
10. The _____ Prime Minister expressed his satisfaction with his talks, _____ that he had enjoyed his stay here.. C
A. visiting, add B. visited, adding
C. visiting, adding D. visited, added
人教版高一册模块四第二单元
Using Language (Reading, Speaking and Writing)教学设计
浙江省温州第四中学 徐长才
Using Language (Reading, Speaking and Writing)语言运用部分是新课标人教版各单元中的重点教学内容，它承载着本单元语言输出教学的重要任务，是对本单元阅读、词汇、语法等各项内容学后的一个运用和检验。因此，授课教师应对这一块教学内容进行科学合理的设计，以全面完成本单元的教学任务。
一、设计思想
1. 以建构主义理论为基础
建构主义理论主张在问题情境下进行学习，要求学生不要盲目或被动地接受和记忆教师传授的知识或课本知识，而是要主动地进行自我探索，将学习过程变成积极参与建构知识的高水平的思维过程（朱文英，2007）。教师要尊重学生已有的知识和经验，并帮助他们将新环境提供的信息整合或重组到自己原有认知结构中，激活学生的思维、启发他们观察、发现、思考、归纳、总结，鼓励他们提出自己的问题和观点。教师在教学Using Language这一部分时，应科学妥当地设置话题情境，激活学生已有的知识，以便使之在新的语言环境中得到拓展和运用，从而构建新的知识。
2. 以任务型教学方法为依托
新课程标准倡导任务型语言教学，它是以具体的任务为学习动力或动机，以完成任务的过程为学习的过程，以展示任务成果的方式（而不是以测试的分数）来体现教学的成就。学生有了具体的动机就能自主地学习，并且主动地用所学语言去做事情，在做事情过程中自然地使用所学语言，在使用所学语言做事情过程中发展语言能力。Using Language这部分的教学就是要求教师设置学生感兴趣的任务，让任务贴近学生的实际生活，符合学生的认知水平，学生完成教师所设任务的同时能够运用本单元所学的语言知识来发展其语言能力。
根据以上教学理论，设计本节课时要体现教师为主导，学生为主体的教学思想，努力创设问题情境，营造轻松愉快的教学气氛，对学生进行充分的语言输入，重点突出对学生语言能力的培养，为学生的语言输出创造良好的语言环境。
二、教材分析
本节课教学内容Using Language（Reading, Speaking and Writing）是本单元的最后一个课时，要求学生以有机农业和绿色食品为话题，复习巩固如何用英语提出忠告和建议，以及用英语制作海报和广告。它是学生在学完前面各项内容后的提升阶段，是对师生落实前面各项内容的一个检验。该部分由Reading, Speaking and Writing三部分组成。其中Reading,和Speaking 都是为Writing作铺垫的，即Reading for writing , Speaking for writing. 《学科教学指导意见》指出，教师可以围绕Reading, Speaking and Writing中相关材料指导学生进行听、说、写的尝试，并指导学生就相关材料进行比较，提出自己的观点和建议。根据新课标的要求，在写作教学之前，教师应作好铺垫，激活灵感，激发兴趣，明确目的和读者对象，讨论主题，搜集素材，语言准备，写提纲等等，从而为接下来重点教学环节打下基础。本节课主要围绕学习设计英语海报和广告展开。值得一提的是在操练Speaking部分时，对功能项目的训练应有所侧重。比如：I’d prefer….because…, This is good value because… It’s a great pity that… If I have a choice I’d choose…because…等属于高一阶段应有所侧重的功能项目。而 I don’t like …because… , You need to … It’s better to …等是初中阶段就应该熟练掌握的功能项目，可以不作为重点来训练。
三、学情分析
这个阶段的高一学生思维正处于活跃的阶段，具有较为丰富的想象力。经过初中三年的学习和磨练，再经过模块一至模块三的学习训练，具备了一定的语言表达能力。本节课中，他们经过两篇关于农业方面文章的阅读，积累了相关的词汇与句式表达，从而为本节课的写作打下了一定的基础。然而，本节课有三个主要环节即阅读、对话和写作。在这三个环节中，学生运用功能项目时，可能只会机械呆板地套用，缺乏灵活性，而且不能把握对话的要点。写作内容是设计英语海报，学生有可能对英语海报的格式及语言表达方面把握不准，导致表达规范性不够和重点不突出的倾向。因此，授课教师在教学设计时应引起足够的重视。另外，基于本节课课型的特点，学生在对话操练前会采用同伴互助即pair work 的方式进行操练，写作过程中会采用讨论和合作探究完成海报的设计。
四、教学目标
1. 语言知识：巩固Using language 这一块所学过的单词，比如：organic, fertilizer, chemical, fertile, supply, mineral, pest, whatever, refer to, nutrition等并学习新词 certain。
2. 语言技能：学会用英语提出忠告和建议，比如，描述某有一农产品的优点与缺点；学会用英语制作海报，从而提高英语写作能力。
3. 情感态度：了解农民的生活，尊重农民的劳动；学会辨别有害食品与绿色食品。
4. 学习策略：合作探究，同伴互助。
5. 文化意识：引发学生对食品的质量与发展农业的思考。
五、教学重点与难点
1. 组织学生用英语说服顾客购买老王的绿色食品，培养学生口头表达能力，为学生的写作作好铺垫；
2. 指导学生用英语制作海报，提高英语写作能力；
六、教学策略与手段
1. 以任务型教学作为课堂教学设计之理念，采用情境教学法、交际教学法、讨论法等教学方法。从一定程度上说，人们使用语言是为了完成各种各样的任务，而任务型的教学活动就是让学习者通过运用所学语言来完成各种各样的交际活动。学习者通过表达、沟通、交涉、解释、询问等各种语言形式来学习和掌握语言，实现目标，感受成功。
2.在教学中突出交际性，注重读写的实用性；同时进行情感与策略调整，以形成积极的学习态度，促进语言实际运用能力的提高；教师还要重视各环节过渡时的教学用语，达到承上启下的作用。
3.坚持“教师为主导，学生为主体，任务为基础”的教学原则，在课堂的不同环节，教师应自觉扮演“设计者、研究者、组织者、促进者和协调者”的角色。
4. 贯彻“教中学，学中用”的策略，真正使学生学以致用。
5.采用多媒体课件展示教学内容，激发学生的学习兴趣，营造良好的课堂氛围。
七、课前准备
学生课前应作好预习准备工作。比如，复习和巩固Using Language部分的单词；要弄清绿色食品，有机肥，农家肥的指向，如何用课本上所给的功能项目向对方提建议和忠告等。教师要认真领会新课标精神，充分分析教材，确定重难点，把握学生的学情，理清教学思路，准备好教学课件和教学素材以及课堂上要用的画笔及纸张，另外要确定好学生的合作小组以及明确组内分工。本节课宜在具有多媒体平台和实物投影仪的教室里进行。
八、教学过程
Step1. Lead-in
Show the students some pictures of green food and junk food and ask them some questions as follows:
1. Which food do you prefer to eat, why?
2. Which of those do you think are green foods and what will you think of when we mention the green food?
设计说明：通过观看图片激发兴趣，回答问题启动学生绿色食品的意识，打开对绿色食品相关话题比如说农场之类等，激活其农业方面的相关思维。
Step2. Reading
教师让学生阅读下面一篇短文，完成文后的任务。
What is green food? Green food, which is healthy and safe for people’s health, refers to the food growing with natural rather than chemical fertilizers. The fertilizer that “green” farmer use is natural waste form animals. They believe that putting this in their fields, which are away from industrial areas and dirty water supplies makes the soil richer in minerals and more fertile. Besides, they can keep the air, the soil and water as well as the food supply free from chemicals.
As everyone knows, green food is usually more expensive to grow than other food which is not safe so that many people would rather buy ordinary food at a much lower price without caring about their health. This means green food doesn’t sell well in China, which worries“green”farmers.
Lao Wang from Nanxijiang Farm, for example, learns to grow green fruits such as watermelons and he gets a big harvest this year. His watermelons sell at 8yuan per kg while the ordinary ones at 4yuan per kg. The problem is that he doesn’t know how to let people in cities know how special his green melons are and may not be able to sell them out before they go bad.
Questions:
1. What does the writer mainly want to tell us?
He wants to tell us something of green food such as the advantages and the disadvantages of it.
2. What are the advantages and the disadvantages of the green food according to the passage?
Advantages: a. healthy and safe for people’s health
b. grown with natural fertilizers
c. away from industrial areas and dirty water supplies
d. free from chemicals
Disadvantages: a. more expensive than other food which is not safe
b. green food doesn’t sell well
3. What is Lao Wang’s trouble?
He doesn’t know how to let people in cities know how special his green melons are and may not be able to sell them out before they go bad.
设计说明：通过阅读，进行语言输入，训练学生阅读技巧如抓主旨大意和细节的能力。弄清绿色食品的利弊和理出老王的烦心事，为顺利过渡到下一个环节作好铺垫。（另外这篇文章是笔者在原有教材基础上，进行了重整以更加适合学生的认知水平，课本上的阅读文章短而浅显）
Step3. Discussion
Activity: Work in pairs and discuss which of Lao Wang’s watermelons would you prefer to buy, your opinions must be based upon the above advantages of green food, using the following expressions, especially the underlined ones.
I would rather… I don’t like…because…
I’d prefer… because… It’s a great pity that…
Should I we …? It’s better to …
This is good value because… If I have a choice I’d choose…because…
What is the advantage of …? You need to…
设计说明：通过讨论，开启学生思维，为进入到对话环节做准备, 巩固和运用本单元的功能项目并且有所侧重。
Step4. Dialogue production
Activity: Work in pairs to help Lao Wang solve his problem. One acts as a customer, the other acts as Lao Wang, who is trying to persuade his customers to buy his watermelons, again using the above expressions. Some pairs will be invited to act your dialogues out.
设计说明：这个环节体现了任务型教学的理念，即学中用，用中学。让学生在具体语境中得体地运用本单元的功能项目,也为下一步写作作好铺垫。
Step5. Pre-writing
What other ways can you think of to help Lao Wang sell his products well? Yes, make a poster or an advertisement. Let’s begin.
Show two posters of which one is well designed and the other is ordinarily designed to the students in order to tell the differences between them and decide which is better. Then draw their attention to the better one. The format of a poster should be known to the students. Also the students should be guided to be able to use attractive heading, beautiful pictures and persuasive words, creative design and direct reasons to form their poster.
以下是两则海报示例及对学生进行海报制作的指导：
Sample 1 sample 2
Reference:
1. The structure of a poster:
Sample 1 sample 2
▲Main heading
▲Part 1 Explain what you sell
▲Part 2 Reasons to buy
(in shortened sentences)
▲Part 3 Impressive slogans
An attractive picture
▲ Main heading
▲Part 1 Impressive slogans
▲ Part 2 Reasons to buy
(in shortened sentences)
▲ Part 3 Explain what you sell
An attractive picture
2. Useful words and expressions:
Healthy and safe; free of chemical fertilizer; rich in nutrition; high in ; grown away from; be certain to ; natural fertilizer;
Follow your desire! This is one step on the road to a …world!
It’s best choice ! just do it!
设计说明：展示两副海报，通过比较，让学生判断其优劣，然后引导学生研究有特色的那副海报，其结构、标题、图片、语言表达等，从而培养学生的鉴赏力，同时给学生提供范本和可能用到的词句供他们运用和模仿。在这一环节里，教师尤其要引导学生品味海报里的语言表达，给出足够的时间让他们讨论和酝酿自己的语句。
Step6. While-writing
Activity: Work in groups of 4 and design your best posters for Lao Wang to sell one of his green fruits. Each of the four should be assigned a concrete job such as deciding the heading, drawing the beautiful pictures and using the most attractive words and expressions.
设计说明：这个环节是本节课的重要环节之一，经过前面几个环节的层层铺垫和语言输入，来达到语言的有效输出。要求学生把学到的语言知识运用到做事中来，体现学以致用的原则；在手段上采用小组合作分工的方式，激发学生的合作意识，共同探究共同分享，感受成功和快乐。
Step7. Post-writing
Give the assessment of the works to the class and then ask some groups to show their works on the screen. Have comparisons of the presented works and then the teacher gives the exact and scientific evaluations.
Assessment Self(自评) Peer
(同伴互评)
Content
(5) Does the poster have a clear structure（结构）? （2）
Does your poster include persuasive reasons？（2）
Do you draw any pictures?（1）
Grammar(2) Do you use tense correctly?(1)
Is your spelling correct?(1)
Language
(3) Do you use any good expressions learnt from this class?(1)
Do you use attractive and brief sentences?(2)
Total marks (10)
设计说明：（1） 引导学生进行自我评价和互评，它不仅符合新课程所倡导的合作、交流和探究的学习理念，而且有益于学生认识自我，树立自信；有助于学生反思和调控自己的学习过程，从而促进综合语言运用能力的不断发展。
（2）教师一要给学生提供评价表，以便对自己的作品作出正确的评价；二要运用鼓励和激励性的语言给予综合评价，做到科学准确，简洁明了，对学生有示范性的作用。
Step8. Summary
In this class we have made it clear what green food is and we have offered our help to Lao Wang to solve his problem by persuading customers to buy his products and making a poster for him. I really appreciate your job. Well done! I hope green food will be always on your dinner table and you will be always healthy with green food.
设计说明：重点环节结束时总结话题可以帮助学生加深对本节课内容的理解，让学生回味本节课的活动，进一步理清思路，结束本单元的学习。
九、板书设计
Unit2. Working the land
Using Language: Reading, Speaking and Writing
Advantages: a. healthy and safe for people’s health
b. grown with natural fertilizers
c. away from industrial areas and dirty water supplies
d. free from chemicals
Disadvantages: a. more expensive than other food which is not safe
b. green food doesn’t sell well
Useful expressions:
I would rather… I don’t like…because…
I’d prefer… because… It’s a great pity that…
Should I we …? It’s better to …
This is good value because… If I have a choice I’d choose…because…
What is the advantage of …? You need to…
十、作业设计
1. Please improve your poster and upload to the web : www.albaba.com .
设计说明：学生在课堂上学到的知识和获得的能力，一旦被运用到实际生活中去，会给他们带来无穷的乐趣和极大的成就感，这将会激励学生更加发奋学习，取得更大的成功。
问题研讨
本节课一直围绕绿色食品和老王的农产品销售这条线展开，应该说作到了层层递进，环环相扣，过渡紧凑，但课后还是觉得有些缺憾。
1. 本课的重点是写，通过写前的各种铺垫，实现语言的有效输出。但是学生的海报设计不论是版面还是语言表达仍不尽人意，有些简单。尤其是海报上语言表述依然幼稚平淡，似乎初中学生也能写出这样的句子。这是否与教材本身的要求有关？
2.学生在对话这个环节里，思路仍然没有打开，仅局限于简单的一来一往的三两个来回，语言简单不能深入话题，语言能力并未得到很大的拓展。
3.如何拓宽学生思维，使之能深入话题，从而提升学生的语言能力，仍然是今后口头表达与写作教学的努力方向。
参考资料
陈琳 王啬 程晓堂等：《英语课程标准解读》，北京师范大学出版社版，第105页。
广东省教育厅教研室： 《英语优秀教学设计与案例》，广东高等教育出版社版，第141
浙江省教育厅：《浙江省普通高中新课程实验学科教学指导意见》，浙江教育出版社版，第49-51页。
朱文英：《建构主义理论指导下的综合技能教学探索》，《中小学外语教学》第4期
（本文在撰写过程中引用了20温州市高中优质课比赛部分选手的材料，在此本人向这些选手表示诚挚的谢意。）
本文经整理发表在2007年12期《中小学外语教学》28-32页上，欢迎同仁们指正。
课型设计与课时分配：
The first period: Reading
The second period Words and Grrmmar
The third period Extensive Reading
The four period Listening
The five period Writing
The six period Summary
The First Period Reading
Teaching goals
1.Target Language
a. 词汇和短语
sunburn, struggle, super, expand, circulate, equip, export, rid…of, be satisfied with, lead a…life, search for, would rather, thanks to, with the hope of, rather than
b. 重点句子
This special strain of rice makes it possible to produce one-third more of the crop in the same fields. P10
He cares little about spending the money on himself or leading a comfortable life. P10
He also doesn’t care about being famous. P10
He feels it gives him less freedom to do his research. P10
His other hobbies include playing mah-jong, swimming and reading. P10
Wishing for things, however, costs nothing. P10
2. Ability goals
Enable students to learn more about agriculture, countryside and farming. By talking they can exchange their experience with each other. By reading they will realize the role that agriculture plays in human life. In fact this world faces a serious problem-starvation. So after reading the passage about Dr Yuan students will know the importance of his achievement to man. Of course they will learn from Dr Yuan some noble character.
3. Learning ability goals
Help students learn how to describe Dr Yuan Longping including his personality.
A. Teaching important points
1. Help to comprehend the text and grasp the main idea of the text.
2.Grasp the usage of some words and expressions.
3.How to help students make up their minds to make contributions to motherland in the future like Dr Yuan.
B. Teaching difficult points
1.How to help students learn more about agriculture.
2.Help students really master the usage of words and expressions.
C. Teaching aids
A tape recorder, a projector and a computer.
D. Teaching procedures & ways
Step 1 Greeting and leading in
look at the two pictures on Page 9 and answer the questions:
1. What are the people doing?
2.Can you tell me something about rice?
.Step 2 Warming up
1.Discussion: (group work)
Have you ever grown any plants? If so, what did you do to grow them? If not, what kind of plant would you like to grow? How will you grow it?
Step 3 Pre-reading
The purpose of this step is to let students know the importance of rice. By answering the two questions, students can easily understand why we call Dr Yuan Longping a pioneer for all people, and why he devotes all his life to the rice research.
1.What do you think would happen if tomorrow there was suddenly no rice to eat?
2. If you had the chance to do one thing to help end famine in the world, what would you do?
Step 4 Fast Reading
The purpose of fast reading is to let students find some useful information, and get familiar with the text. So in this step, teacher designs some questions for students, so that they can easily find the answers and finish the reading task.
1. What does Dr Yuan look like?
2. What’s his achievement?
3. What do you think of him?
Step 5 Careful Reading and Explanation
1.Give students 3 minutes to read and find the main idea of the text. While students are doing this, teacher show the chart on the screen. After they have finished their task, ask them to look at the screen and fill in it.
Show the chart on the screen.
A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
1. He wants everyone to call him a farmer.
2. His biography.
3. His personality.
4. His dreams.
Five minutes later, teachers can ask some of them to fulfil the chart. They can use words, phrases, or sentences to do this. Here is a sample for teacher to refer to.
A PIONEER FOR ALL PEOPLE
1. He wants everyone to call him a farmer.
(1) A scientist works the land.
(2) Sunburnt face and arms, slim, strong body.
(3) Grow hybrid rice.
(4) The first agricultural pioneer.
2. His biography.
(1) In 1931, born.
(2) In 1953, graduated and devoted his life to finding ways to grow rice.
(3) Last year, twenty billion tons of rice was produced. Now, Dr Yuan is circulating his knowledge.
3. His personality.
He is satisfied with his life. Because he doesn’t like money and fame.
4. His dreams.
(1) The first dream.
(2) The second dream.
2.language points:
1)“…for that’s how he regards himself”.
“how he regards himself”, means how he thinks of himself. It refers to a person’s self-image .
2) “…has more, rather than fewer troubles.”?
while “ …has more, rather than fewer troubles” means that you expect fewer troubles but in face you get more than you thought you would.
3) struggle v to make great efforts
e.g. They have struggled for years to free their country from the enemy.
I’m struggling to finish the huge helping you gave me.
4)sunburnt adj sun-tanned
e.g. His sunburnt skin looks healthy.
5)super adj (infml) excellent; splendid
e.g. You’ll like her, she’s super.
You look super in your new clothes.
It was super of you to help.
6) expand v
(cause sth to) become greater in size, number or importance
e.g. Metals expand when they are heated.
Why not try to expand your story into a novel?
7)circulate v
(cause sth to) pass from one person, place, etc to another
e.g. People who circulate false news are to be blamed.
Yet reports of this kind have been circulated by our newspapers.
The news of the enemy’s defeat quickly circulated round the town.
7) equip v
supply sb/sth (with what is needed, for a particular purpose)
e.g. Now all fishing boats are radio-equipped.
They can’t afford to equip their army properly.
Please equip yourself with sharp pencil and a rubber for the exam.
9)export v
send(goods) to another country for sale
e.g. India exports tea and cotton to many different countries.
This company has a large home market but doesn’t export.
10) rid…of make sb/sth free from(sb/sth unpleasant)
e.g. We all wish that we would rid the world of famine.
The farmer recently tried to rid the house of rats.
11) lead… a life, live… a life
e.g. Now we are leading a happy life.
In the old days farmers led a terrible life in the country.
12) be satisfied with, be content with
e.g. The young lady isn’t satisfied with the peaceful life.
Are you satisfied with his answers?
13) would rather, prefer to
e.g. I’d rather walk than take a bus.
I’d rather you knew that now, than afterwards.
Step 5 Listening and Post-reading
At first, let students listen to the tape, and then finish the exercise in Comprehending. In Step IV and V, we have involved some questions in Exercise 3, so teachers can choose some questions to do. For Exx 1 and 2, teachers can leave some time for students to finish and then check the answers with the whole class.
Step 6 Summary and Homework
Today we talked about agriculture. And we also read about Dr Yuan Longping. We have known much about the great scientist. OF course we have learned some words and expressions about farming. Please try to grasp these words and expressions after class. Now please look at the poem on the screen:
Farmers weeding at noon,
Sweat down the field soon.
Who knows food on a tray,
Due to their toiling day.
Do you know it? Read it and say whot does it mean?
(It’s 悯农 written by Li Shen.)
The title is A HARD-WORKING FARMER. This is my gift to you. Please read it together. OK, hope you can remember it when you are having your dinners. Besides, I’d like you to think: even if Dr Yuan’s dreams come true, can this really solve the starvation? Why? This is the homework. Think it over. Next time I’ll ask some of you to give your opinion in the class. Another one is to finish the exercises in learning about Language. Exercise 1,2 and 3 are about useful words and expressions. Finish them.
The Second Period Words and Grammar
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. target language 目标语言
a. 词汇和短语
sunburnt, hunger, expand, circulate, struggle, export , output, satisfied , strain , rid ……of , lead a ….life, would rather , thanks to
b .语法
The-ing form as subject and object.
2. Ability goals能力目标
Enable students to master the usage of the words and expressions above and use the –ing form as subject and object correctly and freely.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Help students learn how to use these words and expressions freely to express their ideas and use the–ing form as subject and object as they like. They can also practise actively and attentively do that they reach their goals
A. Teaching important points 教学重点
The usage of the important words and the-ing form used as subject and object .
B. Teaching important words points
How to use the words and expressions and the-ing form freely .
C. Teaching method
Explaining , discussing and practicing .
D. Teaching aids
A projector and a computer.
E. Teaching procedures & ways
Step 1 Greeting and revision
Free talk:
1. What’s your breakfast ?
2. When you are eating at the dinning-room, do you often find some food thrown away ?
Step II word study
A. Complete the exercise on the screen. Teaches shows the following in the screen
Complete the sentences with the words from the box in proper forms. Some
Words may not be used.
Sunburnt, strain, output , export , rid …of , would rather , increase , satisfied , super ,lead…a life , thanks to , struggle
1. With the development of science and technology china is ____ many kinds of electric products to developing countries.
2. Yao Ming plays basketball in NBA and he is a ____ basketball star.
3. _____ bad weather ,our football match has to be put off.
4. Now the old couple _____ simple but happy _____ in the countryside .
5. Judging from his ___ _face and arms , he works in the open air .
6. I’m very tired . I _____ have a good sleep than go to the cinema .
7. The ____ of corn this year is double that of last year .
8. We ____ wheat to Russia and import silk from Japan .
9. The basketball league _____ by adding four new terns .
10. The people _____ to get out of the burning building .
A few minutes later , the teacher may ask some students to read out their answers and give the Chinese meaning of each sentence . The teacher corrects any mistake and gives some explanations.
Answers to the sentences:
1. exporting 2.super 3.thank to 4. is leading a …life 5.sunburnt 6.would rather 7.output 8.export 9. was strained 10.struggled
B.Finish the Exx 1,2 and 3 on page 11.
Step III grammar
There are two tasks in this step. One is to do some explanations about the structure ; the other is to do some exercises in the discovering useful structures in page 12.
Task 1
A. The following sentences are from the text. There are some useful structures in them . Let students translate them and pay attention to these boldface words .
1…..,he cares little about spending the money on himself or leading a comfortable life . p 10
2.He also doesn’t care about being famous. P 10
3.His other hobbies include playing mah-jong ,swimming and reading .
p 10
4.Wishing for things , however , costs noting . p 10
B.Complete the sentences with the given words in proper forms.
1. Fancy Mary _____ (do ) a thing like that !
2. _____ ( take ) physical exercise every day is profitable to our health .
3. That is a matter of importance , it wants ______ ( handle ) carefully .
4. Her not _____ (come back ) made us disappointed .
5. I must apologize for ______ ( not let )you know ahead of time .
6. Mr Brown regretted ______ (beat ) his son.
Check the answers and correct mistakes if there is any and do some explanations at the same time .
Task 2
A .Do some exercises: Please do ex 2 on page 12. You are asked to rewrite the following sentences using the -ing form as the subject .
Ask some students to do them one by one .
B. Do Exercise 3. This time join the two halves to sentences.
C. Finish EX4 in page 13. Use the following phrases with the –ing form to describe a person you admire.
Teacher can give students four minutes to write a short passage by themselves and then ask one or two students to give their answers.
Step IV Using Structures
A. Finish Exercise 1 on Page 50. Check their answers with the whole class .
B. Exercise Now work in pairs or groups to finish this task.
Step V Homework
Finish all Exercises on Page 49.
The Third Period Extensive Reading
Teaching language
1.Target language
A 重点词语
mineral , reduce , organic , level , whatever , bacteria , refer to , year after year
B 重点句型
It also refers to crops growing with natural rather than chemical fertilizers. P13
Putting this in their fields, they argue, makes the soil……… P13
This is importing because developing a healthy soil reduces diseases …… P13
However, using chemical fertilizers is a big problem. P13
Firstly , leaving chemicals in the ground a long time is not good for ……… P13
Instead, organic farmers insist on changing crop every two or three years. P14
These put the minerals back into the soil, making it rich and healthy … P14
…make sure that what is left in the ground after harvesting becomes a …… P14
2.Ability goals 能力目标
Enable Ss to master the main idea of the text and know the ways of organizing articles.
3.Learning ability goals 学能目标
Help students learn how to enlarge the words and know the ways of the same topic.
A.Teaching important and difficult points
1． How to grasp the main idea of the passage.
2． How to grasp the words and phrases and be able to use them of the same topic.
B.Teaching methods
Show questions, read fast, find the main idea carefully and finish all the tasks.
C.Teaching aids
A recorder and a projector.
D.Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Greeting
Step II Reading
There are three tasks in this. Teachers can ask students to read the articles one paragraph by one paragraph. Ask them some questions about the passages. There are three paragraph in the article. In each passage, there are one or two questions. When students finish these questions, they will find that the structure of the text has turned up.
Task 1 : Questions about the text.
Show the questions on the screen:
1. what is the organic farming?
2. what is the advantage of using natural fertilizer?
3. what is the disvangtage of using chemical fertilizers?
4. what’s the main idea of paragraph 3?
5. why do farmers grow their crops in such ways?
Read the text one paragraph by one paragraph and answer the questions.
Task 2: Structure of the text
Look at the screen. This is the structure of the text. Read it and retell the text according
This is the structure of the text. Read it and text according to it.
Give students some time to retell the text by themselves.if time permits, teacher can ask some of them to read out his or her passage.
Task 3: Exercises on Page 14
Because some of the exercises have been involved in Step II, teachers can leave this part to students.
For Exercise 3, here is a simple:
Organic farming means crops growing with natural fertilizers instead of chemical ones. Yhe natural fertilizer which is natural waste from animals does good to soil. It makes the soil richer in minerals while chemical fertilizers damage the soil, leaving chemicals fertilizers in the ground for a long time and killing both helpful and harmful bacteria and pests. Organic farmers keep the soil rich and healthy by changing plants every two or three years, planting different crops in different layers and planting grass between crops to prevent wind or water from carrying away the soil.
Step III Listening and Language points
1. Listen to the text carefully and pay attention to meanings of the bold words and try to grasp the main idea of each paragraph.
2. Check the meanings of the bold words.
“refer to” means “mean”.
“minerals” means “substances that bodies needs in slight amount”. “Reduce” means “make smaller in number ”.
“Supply” means “something provided
“bacteria” and “poests” mean “microscopic organisms that exist in large number in air, water and soil and insects or animals that destroy plants”.
“level” means “layer”.
“whatever” means “no matter what” .
3. Do some explanations about some important words and phrases.
Show the following sentences on the screen:
1. reduce V make sth smaller in size, number, degree, price, etc
e.g.
This company tries to increase profits by reducing costs.
We have reduced expenses this year.
2. supply V give sb sth that is needed or useful
e.g.
He kept me well supplied with cups of coffee while I wrote the report.
The shop was unable to supply what she wanted.
In Britain milk is supplied to each house in bottles.
3. whatever pron any or every(thing)
e.g.
we will be grateful for whatever amount you cab afford.
Whatever I have is yours.
4. refer to V mention or speak of sb/st
e.g.
When I said some people are stupid, I wasn’t referring to you.
Don’t refer to this mater again.
5. year after year
e.g.
The villagers plant trees on the hill year after year
Step IV Further reading
Translate the sentences and pay attention to the boldfaced parts of each sentence.
1. It also refers to crops growing with natural rather than chemical fertilizers. P13
2. Putting this in their fields, they argue, makes the soil … P13
3. This is important because developing a healthy soil reduces diseases ... P13
4. However, using chemical fertilizers is a big problem. P13
5. Firstly, leaving chemicals in the ground for as long time is not food for… P13
6. Instead, organic farmers insist on changing crops every two or three years. P14
7. These put the minerals back into the soil, making it rich and healthy … P14
8. … make sure that what is left in the ground after harvesting becomes a … P14
Step V Reading on Page 51
A. Answer these questions:
1: What’re his ambitions or dreams?
2.What made him have such ambition?
3.How did he get his achievement?
4. How many suggestions did he give to farmers?
5. What’s his contribution?
B. Fill in the chart in Page 52.
After students finish the chart, check the answers.
Step VI Homework
To collect some information about the safety and importance of green food.
The Fourth Period Listening
Teaching goals 教学目标
By listening the materials, require the students to grasp the ways of listening and try to improve their listening ability.
1. Ability goals
Get the key words of each listening material, and then get the main ideas of theirs, so that students can catch the passage and realize the purpose of listening.
a. Change what they heard into their own thoughts and express them out in their language.
2. Learning ability goals
Help students get some skills in listening: First listening to get a general idea; second listening to find some key words and write down the required information; finally, check the answers.
A. Teaching important and difficult points
Train to get the key words by reading the questions before listening, understand the whole passage and then answer some questions about the text.
B.Teaching methods
Instruction and practice
C.Teaching aids
A tape recorder and a projector
Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Lead-in
Free Talk:
Where did you go over your weekend?
Step II Listening on Page 14
1. Teacher shows the following words and asks students to tell their meanings in Chinese.
valley competitor determined pour carrots cucumbers pumpkins attack
wildfire sigh solid
2. Listen to the tape for the first time, and get a general idea of the passage.
.
3. Listen to the tape again and fill in the chart in Exercise 1, page 14.
Show the answer chart on the screen for students so that they can check it quickly.
Farming Practices Mr Jone’s farm Mr Smith’s farm
Crops grown Carrots, cucumbers, pumpkins Carrots, cucumbers, pumpkins
Fertilizer Chemical Natural
Other plant nutrition Water Water
Results Empty inside Solid and healthy indise
4.Listen to the tape once again. This time we’ll finish Exercise 2 and 3.
Step III Listening on Page 48
Play the tape for three times. Ask students to finish the whole exercises And then check the answer with the whole class.
Step IV Listening on Page 50
This is an easy listening material. The purpose is to give students some information about early faming methods in different area of the world. What students should do is to read the descriptions on Page 50,and match them with the correct sites on Page51. listen twice.
Check the answers with the whole class.
Step V Summary and Homework
Today we mainly do some listening practice. Desert is expanding continuously, which makes us worried. As students we should pay more attention to the environmental problems. We should try to play our role in stopping our earth from becoming word please do more practice after class so as to improve your listening ability.
The Fifth Period Writing
Teacher goals
1. Target language
I would rather ...
I don't ...because ...
I'd prefer ...because ...
It's a great pity that ...
Should I/ we ...?
It's better to ...
This is good value because ...
If I have a choice I'd choose ...because ...
What is the advantage of ...?
You need to ...
2.Ability goals
To improve students' integrating skills. It helps students express themselves and develop an argument to try to persuade to believe that their ideas are correct.
3.Learning ability goals
Let students learn how to express themselves and write a clear and attractive poster to persuade to believe what they say.
A.Teaching important and difficult points
1. To understand what they read.
2.How to find reasons to persuade people to believe what they say. 3.How to write an attractive poster.
B.Teaching methods
Reading, speaking ,discussing and writing.
C.Teaching aids
A projector and a recorder.
D.Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Lead-in
There are three main tasks in these period.
1. Deal with the reading. Speaking and Writing on Page 15.
2. Do SPEAKING AND WRITING TASK on Page 53.
3. Finish TALKING on Page 48
Step Ⅱ Reading
1.This is the first step of Reading, Speaking and Writing. In the three steps, teacher should remind students the following: for reading, they should get the key words of the passage, in order to get a good understanding and make a good base for the writing; for speaking, they should attend to what they will do. Be careful not be off the point; for writing ,the most important thing is to practise writing using phrases, instead of the whole sentences. Give students a minute to read it and then show a chart on the screen to let them make sure the important points of this passage.
Advantage:
1. Healthy and safe
2. Free of chemical fertilizers
3. Grown away from industrial areas
4. Away from dirty water supplies Disadvantage:
1. People don’t know about the food and how good it is
2. More expensive than other food which is not so safe
Read Exercise 2 and then finish the task with the words and expressions below. Make sure that all that the students say is to persuade people to buy their food! So please don't be off this point. Give students some time to do this.
Step Ⅲ Speaking
Three minutes later, teacher can collect students' ideas. There are two kinds of ways to do this task. One is the seller's speech; he other is dialogue between two students. Students can choose either of them to practise the phrases below.
Step Ⅳ Writing
In this part the students should not use the whole sentences, using phrases or notes is OK. Ask students to read the instructions, and the example on Page 16 carefully. And then write down their poster.
Give students three minutes to practise. And give them enough help, if some of them need it. Three minutes later teacher can ask one or two pairs of students to-act out their dialogues.
Main heading
This explains that you sell green food.
Reasons to buy
1. ( one reason )
2. ( one reason )]
3. ( one reason )
4. ( one reason )
Why it is good value. Buy the best fruits here
We only sell green food in this shop!
Best choice at best price!
Safe, healthy, clean, fresh. Far away from any pollution.
1. No chemical fertilizer, all organic fertilizers
2. Clean air, clean water
3. No poison, no pesticides
4. Home in heaven
Healthy food means healthy life. Far away from diseases, without worries, full of happiness. ( one reason )
Step V Talking
The purpose of this task is to let students practice how to persuade others, using some useful expressions below the instructions. There are two points that students should pay attention to. One is that they must know what is the subject they will talk about; the other is that they should use the expressions to practice presuasive skill. So, there are two tasks to finish the talking. First, teacher should help the students to remember who is Leng Jianli and what did she do. Second, ask the students to practice.
the chart will give you more information about Leng Jianli. Maybe it is useful to your talking.
What Leng Jianli did
● Plant trees, bushes and other plants in the desert near her farm.
● Carry water from far away and take very good care of them.
● Have been working very hard for many years.
● Turn desert into farmland.
Read the instructions in Talking on Page 48.
Step Ⅳ Speaking and Writing Task on Page 53
If time permits, teacher can do the ”Speaking and Writing task on Page 53 in this period, or leave it as homework.
Sample writing:
A fish farm is a pond or cage in the sea where farmers raise fish. In this case farmers can help fish grow faster to be big enough. This summer holiday I'm going to visit a fish farm near Yingshan lake.
A fish farmer has to be careful when he keeps fish in a pond .He must keep the water of the ponds from becoming too dirty. He also is to keep fish very close together.
What I am most interested in is to feed fish. I think fish must be fed regularly--twice or three times a day. I enjoy the scene in which fish jump up to take food. Besides feeding, the other task I have to do is to try to stop fish being affected by disease. I understand that fish disease are a serious problem. If that happened, all the fish in the pond would die. So I have to examine fish for disease. If so,I have to give some medicine to the fish.
I imagine I'll be busy on a fish farm and have a good time.
Step Ⅶ Homework
1. Finish the Project on Page49 .
2. Summing up on Page 16.
The sixth Period
Teaching goals
1.Target language
Word and expressions of this unit.
2.Ability goals
Enable students to summarize what they learned and make a check by themselves.
3.Learning ability goals
Help Ss learn how to summarize what they have learned according to the instructions in the Summing up and Checking Yourself.
A. Teaching important and difficult points
How to review and conclude what students learned.
B. Teaching methods
Help students learn by themselves.
C.Teaching aids
A projector.
C. Teaching procedures & ways
Step I Exx on page 49
For Exx 1 and 2, teacher can show them the answer sheet, so that they can check the answers quickly. For Exercise 3, teacher can ask some of them to go to the blackboard to write down their translation. And then check them with the whole class. If there are some problems, teacher can ask student to discuss and give them some suggestions to solve them.
Step II Summary
1.Fill in the chart on Page 16 to sum up what we have learned in this unit.
SUMMING UP
Write down what you have learned about working the land.
We have learned about agriculture and deeds of Dr Yuan Longping. We also know what organic farming is and grasp how to express our ideas and write a poster.
From this unit you have also learned:
Useful verbs: expand export circulate rid…of reduce struggle equip
Useful nouns: hunger bacteria fertilizer mineral supply level
Useful adjectives and adverbs: super sunburnt satisfied fertile organic
Other expressions: would rather lead a…life refer to year after year
New grammer item: the –ing form used as the subject and object
Step III Project
As for project on Page 54.teachers can ask the students to choose three kinds of crops and refer to some books to find out where they are grown. Students may be asked to make a booklet after class and display it on the classroom wall for the rest of the class to enjoy. The contents of the booklet include if they can be grown in different climate and countries and where they cannot be grown.
Here are some information for them to refer to::
Cucumbers are grown for eating fresh or preserving as pickles. They must be grown in warm temperatures and full sunlight, and will not stand frost. Cucumbers mature quickly and are best suited to large gardens but can be grown in small areas if caged or trellised.
Cucumbers do best in loose, sandy loam soil but can be grown in any well drained soil. Remove rocks, large sticks and trash before preparing the soil. Leave fine pieces of plant material such as dead grass and small weeds. They will help enrich the soil when turned under. Spade the soil to a depth of 8 to 12 inches. This is about the depth reached by most shovels or spading forks. Turn each shovel of soil completely over so all plant materials are covered with soil.
Tomatoes are warm season plants requiring at least six hours per Temperatures are very important. Most varieties of tomatoes will not set fruit unless the average nighttime temperature stays above 55degrees. If nighttime temperatures are expected to drop below 55 degrees, protect the plants using a polyethylene film.
One of the most common problems with tomatoes is called blossom end rot which appears as a gray or dark leathery scar or rot on the blossom end of the fruit. It can also be caused by a lack of calcium in the soil. Another common problem of tomatoes is blossom drop. This can occur if nighttime temperatures drop below 55 degrees and plants are not protected. Germination and tube growth are so slow that the blossoms drop off before they can be fertilized.
Peas are a frost-hardy, cool-season vegetable that can be grown throughout most of the United States, wherever a cool season of sufficient duration exists. For gardening purposes, peas may be classified as garden peas (English peas), snap peas and snow peas(sugar peas). Garden pea varieties have smooth or wrinkled seeds. The smooth-seeded varieties tend to have more starch than the wrinkled-seeded varieties. The wrinkled-seeded varieties are generally sweeter and usually preferred for home use. The smooth-seeded types are used more often to produce ripe seeds that are used like dry beans and to make split-pea soup. Snap peas have been developed from garden peas to have low-fiber pods that can be snapped and eaten along with the immature peas inside. Snow peas are meant to be harvested as flat, tender pods before the peas inside develop at all. The Southern pea (cowpea) is an entirely different warm-season vegetable that is planted and grown in the same manner as beans.
Step IV Checking yourself
This is a chance for students to collect knowledge they have learned in this unit. Teacher can give the students some time to discuss it and then finish the questions in the chart. Doing this task can improve students ability of teaching by oneself.
Step V Homework
1.Preview the next unit
2.Show the students some English farming proverbs and ask the students learn them by heart:
He who does not rise early never does a good day’s work.
起床不早，一天的工作干不好。
Go to bed with the lamb and rise with the lark.
随羔羊就寝，与云雀同起。
A barley-corn is better than a diamond to a cock..
对一只公鸡来说，一颗麦粒优于一颗钻石。
The cuckoo comes in April, and stays the month of May; sings a song at Midsummer, and then goes away.
布谷鸟，四月来，五月一直在，仲夏唱歌，然后就离开。
Always take out the meal-tub, and never putting in, soon comes to the bottom.
取粮不储粮，桶底粮光光。
No mill, no meal
不磨面就没饭吃。
M4U2 Entering a new sport into the Olympics Project
课前导学：
一．浏览课文后请回答下列问题
1.What is an ad campaign?
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
2.List one or two ads that you like:
______________________________
______________________________
二． Complete the following form according to Para 2, 3&4. (每空一词)
sports Reasons
Which ones are out ? ______,________,
________,_______,
________
They became less popular and had to make way for new, more popular sports.
Which ones are in?
___________ They are popular and are played all over the world.
Which ones are still trying?
___________ The IOC wants to _________ a ________of sports and there are already many other sports in ____________ like ________,__________ and tae kwon do.
三．Fill in the blanks with the words and expressions from the text.
It is a long process to enter a sport into the Olympics. Before a sport can be considered by the International Olympic ____________, many ____________ should be met. A sport must have its own ____________. It must be practised by men in ___________ 75 countries on at least ____ continents and practised by _______ in at least 40 countries and on three continents. Moreover, a ________sport must be dropped so as to ________ the Olympics are _______ under _________.
During the development of the Olympics, some sports, such as___________ - a branch in the Martial arts, were added. Still some other less popular sports such as golf and ________ were removed and had to ____________ new, more popular sports. _________, a Chinese martial arts, is still trying to get into the Olympics. We hope that some day Wushu will be included in the___________.
四．Words preparation
1. 多样的adj. → 多样化n. → 改变 v.
2. 确定，决定 v. → 确定，决心 n. → 决意的；坚决的
3.特定的；特别的adj. 4.迎合，有吸引力vi.
5.媒体 n. →（复数）n. 6.听众n.
7．回应 vi. →反应 n. 8. 目标，目的n.
9.对象，靶子n. 10.非常，极其adv.
11.搜集，收集vt. 12.方法，途径n.
五．Phrases preparation
1.为了，以便 in to
3.迎合，对..有吸引力
5. 传达
2.目标受众
4.对..关心
6.组织，汇集
质疑讨论：
请提出预习中的问题
拓展延伸：
1. particular adj. 特定的，特别的；挑剔的
搭配：in particular 特别，尤其（作状语）；特别的，专门的（作后置定语）
be particular about/over 对….很挑剔 be particular to…. 为….所特有
⑴Language is particular mankind. 语言是人类特有的。
⑵I didn’t feel well on that evening. 就在那天夜晚，我觉得不太舒服。
⑶He is very particular his food.他吃东西非常挑剔。
⑷It was a good concert - I enjoyed the last song .
那是场不错的音乐会-我尤其喜欢最后那首歌。
2. audience n. (C) 听众，观众，读者
⑴There was a / audience. 观众很多/少。
⑵There audience clapping for 10 minutes.
⑶The program is said to have over two million.
Audience 指整体时，作谓语动词用单数形式；指成员时，作主语，谓语动词用复数形式。类似的名词还有 class, group, crowd, club, team, crew, family, company, staff, committee, government, public等。
3.determine vt. 确定，决定，使决定
determine sth. 确定/决定某事 determine to do 决定做某事
determine sb. to do 使某人决定做某事 determine that……决心
⑴We should determine a date for the meeting.
⑵He determined to travel no futher that night.
= He determined that he no further that night.
那天晚上他决定不再往前走了。
⑶是什么使她下定决心要嫁给他？ What determined her to marry him?
拓展：determination n. 决心 determined adj. 有决心的
be determined to do sth. 决心做某事
⑷Many graduates from college work in the west countryside.
许多大学毕业生决心要到西部农村去工作。
4. appeal vi. 迎合，吸引；恳请，呼吁
appeal to sb. 吸引某人 appeal (to sb.) for sth. 为某人（向某人）呼吁
appeal to sb. to do sth. 恳请、呼吁某人干某事
⑴The design has to appeal to all ages and social groups.
⑵The police are appealing the public information about the crime.
⑶She appealed . 她恳求我们与她同行。
5. react vi. 作出反应，回应
react to sth. 对…作出反应 react with /on sth. 与..发生化学反应
react against 反对；反抗
⑴Workers reacted angrily the news of more job losses at the factory.
工人们对工厂进一步裁员的消息感到气愤。
⑵Iron can react with oxygen. 铁可以与氧气发生化学反应。
⑶The boy often reacts his parents by going against their wishes.
这男孩经常以违背父母的意愿来反抗他们。
6.get sth. across (to) sb. 将（想法、信息等）传达给某人；使理解
get across ( to sb.) 被传达；被理解
⑴ He sometimes had trouble his meaning in English.
有时候他不知道如何用英语表达他的想法。
⑵ Did your speech get across the crowd? 你的演讲听众理解了吗？
拓展: get across 还有“过（马路、校等）”讲。
7. put…together 组织；整理出；组装
He took the machine apart and then .
8. approach n. (C) 方法，途径 （后接 to sth.） v. (在距离或时间上)靠近，接近
⑴ Let’s take a new approach the problem.
⑵ All the approaches to the airport were blocked by the police.
9. …an ad campaign is an organized programme of advertisements using various kinds of ads to reach a particular audience.
句中 using…audience 是现在分词短语作 ，修饰名词 。句中的现在分词短语相当于一个定语从句：
10. When planning a public welfare campaign, you may want to ask yourself…
“when+ 现在分词”结构作 。
句中省略了you are ,其完整形式应为
当when ,while, until , if, unless 等引导的状语从句的主语与主语的主语相同且含be 动词时，从句中的主语及部分谓语（be动词）可省略。
⑴ He won’t come to the party unless (he is ) invited.
⑵ If (it is ) possible, I should like to have two copies of it.
迁移创新：
一．单词巩固
1. Part of my job is to m_________ good relationship with our suppliers (供应商).
2. Students who fail to meet these r____________ will not be admitted to the University.
3. The five rings on the Olympic flag stand for five c_________.
4. Applicants for the job(申请工作者) must have ___________(先前的) experience.
5. Have you joined the Teachers’ _________(协会)?
6. Our c_________(目前的) methods of production are too expensive.
7. Wushu, a Chinese m_________ art, is still trying to get into the Olympics.
8. How long can you b_________ on one foot?
9. The bank has many b_______ all over the world.
10. He r_________ the manuscript (原稿)of his book before sending it to the publisher.
二．单项选择
1. This is a very interesting book. I’ll buy it, ______________.
A. how much may it cost B. no matter how it may cost
C. however much it may cost D. how may it cost
2. We have every reason to believe that _____ 2008 Beijing Olympic Games will be ____ success.
A. /; a B. the; / C. the; a D. a; a
3. The young man ________ in studying paid no attention to the outside world.
A. involved B. involving C. to be involved D. being involved
4. The _____ look on her face suggested that Mary _____ the birthday gift from her mother.
A. exciting; like B. excited; like C. exciting; liked D. excited; liked
5. As my car is ________, I ______ walk to work every day.
A. in repair; have to B. under repair; must
C. in repair; must D. under repair; have to
6.We should do what we can to _______ the teachers’ requirements.
A. fill B. meet C. give D. use
7. Her new image is totally different from her _____ one.
A. previous B. fashionable C. current D. unique
8. The trees will be cut down to _______ the highway.
A. make contribution to B. make way for
C. turn into D. turn up
9. They couldn’t keep the fire _________ control and the whole house burned to the ground.
A. under B. above C. on D. off
10.This cake is very sweet. You __________ a lot of sugar in it.
A. should put B. could have put C. might put D. must have put
参考答案：
课前导学：
二，
sports Reasons
Which ones are out ? golf, rugby,
polo, power
boating
They became less popular and had to make way for new, more popular sports.
Which ones are in? tae kwon do
They are popular and are played all over the world.
Which ones are still trying? wushu
The IOC wants to __maintain___ a ___balance_____of sports and there are already many other sports in __Martial Arts
like __judo,___ fencing and tae kwon do.
.
三，committee requirements association at least four
Women current ensure kept control
tae kwon do rugby make way for Wushu Olympics
三． various/ variety /vary
determine/ determination/ determined
particular/appeal/media/medium/audience/react/reaction/audience/react/reaction/goal/target/extremely/gather/approach/
order/ target audience/ appeal to/ be concerned with /get sth. Across / put sth. Together
拓展延伸： to/ particular / about/ in particular
Large/small was/were an audience of
Would travel / are determined to
设计必须雅俗共赏，老幼皆宜 to / for to us to go with her
to / against
getting/across/ to
put it together
to
定语，programme, which uses various kinds of ads to reach a particular audience
状语， when you are planning……campaign
迁移创新
1. maintain 2. requirements 3. continents 4. previous 5. association
6. current 7. martial 8. balance 9. branches 10. revised
C C A D D
B A B A D
1. 单元教学目标
技能目标Skill Goals
Talk about different types of theme parks in different cultures
Show people around a place and give directions
Study word formation
Write an introduction to a place with detailed explanations
II. 目标语言
功
能
句
式
Expressions used to show people around a place
We are happy to show you ...
Over there is the ...
Down the path you can see ...
The main idea/ theme in the park is ...
You will enjoy doing/ seeing ...
Expressions used to ask the way and give directions
Can/ Could you show me where ... is?
Can/ Could you tell me the way to ... ?
How can we get to ... ?
How far is/ are the ...?
You can reach ... by bus/ subway/ ...
Go along/ down ... and turn left/ right at the ... crossing.
It is just behind/ next to/ opposite the ... , you can’t miss it.
It is about ... minutes’ walk/ bus ride.
It is about ... meters away.
词
汇
1． 四会词汇
theme, amuse, amusement, various, variety, rides, shuttle, charge, admission, profit, souvenir, athletic, brand, equipment, sneaker, minority, fantasy, settler, experiment, advance, advanced, technique, test, cloth, Brazil, jungle, creature, up-to-date, excitement, volunteer, translator
2． 认读词汇
Ferris wheel, roller coaster, involve, fantasyland, marine, imaginary, imagination, vary, Futuroscope, mysterious, T-Rex combination
3． 词组
theme parks, provide ... with ... , such as, such ... that ... , a variety of, base on/ upon, involve ... in, come to life, get close to, take an active part in, go on a trip
结构 Word Formation
重
点
句
子 1.Parks provide people with a place to amuse themselves and to escape their busy lives for a while.
2. Though parks share this basic purpose, they find various ways to meet this need.
3. They are such huge places that visitors often use shuttles to get around.
4. These new parks have a variety of things to see and do.
5. Theme parks have a certain idea - a certain theme - that the whole park is based on.
6. Its purpose is to involve visitors in physical exercise and athletic competition.
7. ..., and there are future parks, where people can go on imaginary trips to space and use advanced computer techniques to experience life in the future.
8. Science and technology-based theme parks like Futuroscope provide up-to-date information, hands-on learning and lots of fun and excitement.
III. 教材分析和教材重组
1. 教材分析
本单元以Theme parks 为话题，旨在通过本单元的教学，使学生了解分散于世界各地的各种各样的主题公园，学会向别人介绍某个景点的大体情况，以及计划各项活动，同时培养学生对世界及生活的热爱。
1.1 Warming up通过向学生呈现四个风格各异的世界著名主题公园，激发学生学习本单元的兴趣。
1.2 Pre-reading 通过学生对主题公园里活动的想象，交流了解主题公园的有关知识。
1.3 Reading 通过介绍世界各地形式各异的主题公园概况，使学生了解风格迥异的各国主题公园。
1.4 Comprehending 让学生从文章的标题及各段大意来整体理解课文。
1.5 Learning about Language 分词汇和语法两部分。
Discovering useful words and expressions 中的练习1是以给出意思写出相对应词汇的形式考查对文章中重要词汇及短语的理解。练习2 是以短文填词完型的形式考查对练习1中词汇的运用。练习4则以完成句子的形式考查学生对get/ be closer to这一短语不同意义及用法的准确运用。
Discovering useful structures 是通过填表格的练习方式向学生呈现英语词汇不同的构词法（合成及派生）。
1.6 Using Language 分为四个部分练习听、说、读、写。
1) Listening练习听力可配合Listening on P69 in Workbook及Listening Task on P73 进行。
2） Reading and speaking这是一篇泛读文章，介绍更新奇的主题公园（观察未来）。然后让学生练习朗读课文的第二段，注意个别特殊的发音方式。接着把（观察未来）公园的各项活动性质归类及解释理由。然后根据自己对文章的理解为该主题公园绘制一张地图。最后分别说出（观察未来）主题公园会让你体验到的三种时间及空间的经历。
3） Writing要求介绍某一主题公园的概况，包括种类，方位，各活动项目及门票收费。
4） Speaking根据所准备的公园概况介绍写一段
对话，作为导游回答一位正在游览公园的朋友对公园情况的一些询问。
2. 教材重组
2.1 因本教材重点强调的是阅读能力，故将Warming-up, Reading, Comprehending合在一起设计成一节“精读课”。
2.2 Learning about Language, Using Structures 和Workbook中的Using words and expressions, Using structures合在一起,设计成一节“语法课”（既有词汇又有语法）。
2.3 将Using Language 中的Listening, Workbook 中的Listening 和Listening task 整合成一节“听力课”。
2.4 将Reading and speaking，Workbook 中的Reading task整合为一节“泛读课”，旨在从整体上理解课文，作为对本单元话题“主题公园”的知识扩充。
2.5 将Speaking, Workbook 中的Talking 和Speaking task整合为一节“口语课”。
2.6 将Using Language 中的Writing和Workbook中的Writing task 整合成一节“写作课”。
3. 课型设计与设时分配（经教材分析，根据学情，本单元可以用六个课时教完。）
1st period Intensive Reading
2nd period Language Study
3rd period Listening
4th period Extensive Reading
5th period Speaking
6th period Writing
IV. 分课时教案
The First Period Intensive Reading
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language 目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
theme park, provide ... with ... , amuse oneself, various, a variety of, shuttle, charge ... for, admission, make a profit, souvenir, base on, involve ... in, athletic, brand, equipment, sneakers, come to life, minority, fantasy, get close to, settlers, take an active part in, experiment, advanced, technique
b． 重点句子
1) In these parks, people sit chatting, play games, listen to birds’ singing, or just relax a bit.
2) They are such huge places that visitors often use shuttles to get around.
3) The big companies that own theme parks expect to make a profit not just by the charges for admission, but also by selling souvenirs in their shops and advertising them on television.
4) The park is named after Walt Disney, the famous film maker.
5) Disneyland has exciting rides, visits to castles and chances to get close to life-size cartoon figures.
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Enable the students to know something about the various theme parks all over the world, to understand the difference between a theme park and a traditional park and try to finish the comprehending exercises.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
Learn how to generalize and compare the similarities and differences.
Teaching important points 教学重点
To solve the questions in Comprehending, and let the students find out the main idea of each paragraph, give a summary of the text.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
How to give a general instruction/ description of a place.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Listening;
Skimming;
Scanning;
Task-based.
Teaching aids 教具准备
A recorder and a computer.
Teaching procedures && ways 教学过程与方式
Step I Revision
T: Good morning/ afternoon, boys and girls! First let’s have a dictation about the words and phrases in Unit 4. Take out a piece of paper, please.
major, local, represent, Columbia, introduce, approach, touch, strange, express, be likely to, general, avoid spoken, misunderstand, punish, at ease
T: Now, hand in your paper please; I’ll check your work after class.
Step II Warming up
T: Let’s look at the pictures on P33. These are four pictures of different parks - A garden in Suzhou, Hyde Park in London, World Waterpark in Canada, Disneyland. What kind of parks are they?
S1: I think A garden in Suzhou is a place when people have a walk in their spare time to enjoy the beautiful trees, flowers, lakes, stones, buildings and relax themselves.
T: What about Hyde Park in London? What kind of park is it?
S2: Hyde Park is a famous park in the world, so I’ve read it in magazines. It is the most well-known park in London. It used to be a hunting park for the Royal family in the 18th Century. Now it is open to the public and people can enjoy themselves there with the various activities, including horse-riding. It’s best-known for the Speaker’s Corner where people can make speeches and express their view points freely.
T: Very good. So what about World Waterpark in Canada?
S3: I haven’t heard of this park before. I guess it is a park where people can take part in all kinds of activities in water.
T: Good guessing. And I am sure all of you have heard of Disneyland.
S4: Yes, it is the oldest theme park in the world and I think it is the most popular park in the world too. In the Disneyland, people can not only enjoy the exciting activities there, but also get close to the life-size cartoon characters like the Mickey Mouse and Donald Duck, which appear in some of Walt Disney’s famous cartoon films. Luckily for us, a new Disneyland is being built in Hong Kong, so a few years later, we will have the chance to go and experience the excitement of this wonderful place in the world.
T: Which one of these parks would you like to visit most if you have the chance?
Sa: Of course I would go to Disneyland. I have watched so much about it on TV and I’ve been dreaming about shaking hands with those lovely cartoon characters and taking pictures with them.
Sb: I would like to go to Waterpark, because I like swimming and I like to take part in the activities in water in this park.
Sc: I would go to Hyde Park. I want to go horse-riding, and above all, have the experience of making a speech in front of a crowd of people like a president. That’ll be really exciting.
…
Step III Reading
Skimming
T: It’s interesting to listen to your ideas. Today we are going to study a passage about theme parks. The title is THEME PARKS-FUN AND MORE THAN FUN. I would like you to read the passage quickly for the first time to get a general idea of the passage. At the same time, please find out the topic sentence of each paragraph.
(3 minutes later)
T: Have you got the main idea of the passage? Who can tell me the topic sentences of six paragraphs?
Topic sentences
Paragraph 1. Parks provide people with a place to amuse themselves and to escape their busy lives for a while.
Paragraph 2. In recent decades, however, many parks have been designed to provide entertainment.
Paragraph 3. Theme parks have a certain idea-a certain theme-that the whole park is based on.
Paragraph 4. Some are history or culture theme parks.
Paragraph 5. The oldest theme park in the world is Disneyland, built near Los Angeles, California in 1955.
Paragraph 6. Other theme parks including marine or ocean parks, science theme parks, and future theme parks.
Scanning
T: After the first reading, we have all got a general idea of the passage. So I would like you to read it carefully again and try to find the answers to these detailed questions.
Teacher shows the questions on the screen.
1. What is the basic purpose of theme parks? What do people do there?
2. Do these parks charge people for admission?
3. What is the purpose of a theme park?
4. What is the differences between a theme park and an ordinary park?
Differences Ordinary parks Theme parks
Activities
Size
Facilities
Charges
Souvenirs
5. What activities will be offered to visitors in a sports theme park?
6. Can they do shopping there? What can they buy?
7. What can visitors see and do in history or culture theme parks?
8. What is Disneyland like? What can visitors do there?
9. What can people do in marine or ocean theme parks, science theme parks and future theme parks?
(10 minutes later)
T: Have you got the answers? I would like some of you to answer the questions. Let’s listen and check whether they have got them correctly.
Teachers check some students for the answers.
suggested answers
1. The basic purpose of a park is to provide people with a place to amuse themselves and to escape their busy lives for a while. In these parks, people sit chatting, play games, listen to birds’ singing, or just relax a bit. And families go there to have picnics or have fun together in other ways.
2. These parks charge people little or no money for admission.
3. The purpose of a theme park is to provide entertainment.
4. See the following table.
Differences Ordinary parks Theme parks
Activities rides such as a Ferris wheel, merry-go-round of a roller coaster. a variety of things to see and do
Size usually not very large huge places that visitors often use shuttles to get around
Facilities no restaurants or hotels restaurants, hotels and shops
Charges charge little or none charge for admission
Souvenirs sell no souvenirs sell souvenirs in their shops
5. A sports theme park will offer visitors sports to play or watch.
6. Yes. They can buy sports equipment or clothing, such as basketballs, footballs, sneakers and so on.
7. Visitors can see how our ancestors dressed, worked and lived; and how special groups of people dress today, what they eat and what their homes look like. They might go for rides on animals, help cook cultural foods or have their pictures taken in the clothing of emperors or of minority people.
8. Disneyland is so different from other parks that it seemed like a place of fantasy. Visitors can enjoy seeing the characters from Disney films, go on exciting rides, visits to castles and get close to life-size cartoon figures. They can also see model villages of life in the past which show how the early settlers in America lived.
9. People can see and swim with dolphins and learn about ocean life in an ocean park; They can take an active part in experiments in a science theme park; They can go on imaginary trips to space and use advanced computer techniques to experience life in the future park.
Step IV Comprehending (P34)
Part 1
T: Let’s look back at the title of the passage. THEME PARKS- FUN AND MORE THAN FUN. Why does the writer think that theme parks are places fun and more than fun? I would like you to think about this question and tell me your opinions.
S: In my opinion, it means that theme parks are more than amusement parks with rides, such as a Ferris wheel, merry-go-round or a roller coaster, they are such huge places that visitors often use shuttles to get around, and they have a lot of things to see and do. So they are places fun and more than fun.
Part 2
T: We have read about some of the different theme parks in the world. Have you ever thought of this question: Why do people build so many different theme parks? I would like you to have a class discussion and tell me 3 purposes for people building theme parks according to this passage.
(Some time later)
T: Please express your ideas.
Suggested answers
Purpose 1 : to provide entertainment.
Explanation 1: because they have a variety of things to see and do.
Purpose 2: to make a profit by charging for admission and selling souvenirs.
Explanation 2: because they all charge money for admission of the hotels, restaurants, and for the rides and shows in the parks as well, and they sell a lot of souvenirs.
Purpose 3: to provide people with some unusual experiences.
Explanation 3: because there are parks for people to experience the life in the past, in the future, in the ocean and so on.
Part 3
T: Let’s sum up the main idea of each paragraph.
Suggested answers
Paragraph 1: Parks provide people with a place to amuse themselves and to escape their busy lives for a while.
Paragraph 2: Theme parks have been designed to provide entertainment with a variety of things to see and do.
Paragraph 3: Theme parks have a certain idea/ theme that the whole park is based on.
Paragraph 4: The history and culture theme parks.
Paragraph 5: The Disneyland.
Paragraph 6: The ocean parks and the science theme parks.
Theme of the passage: Theme parks
Step V Discussion
T: If you have enough time and money, would you like to go traveling to see the natural beauty of the country or go the theme parks to enjoy the exciting experiences? Give reasons for your choice.
a) Teacher divides the class into groups of four. Each group tries to reach an agreement and to collect as many reasons as possible from the group members.
b) After the discussion, the teacher asks a student from each of the groups to report the decision of their group and to give their reasons for the decision.
Step VI Homework
Remember all the new words and phrases in the reading passage.
Write a summary of the reading passage using the new words.
详细内容请订阅
《名师说课》
Unit 3 A taste of English humour
I. 单元教学目标
技能目标Skill Goals
Talk about different types of humour; a taste of English humour
Learn how to express one’s emotions
Learn the -ing form as the Predicative, Attribute && Object Complement
Learn to write humorous stories
II. 目标语言
功 能 句 式 情感（Emotions）
I enjoy this very much because ...
I laugh at that kind of thing because ...
This is fun because ...
How wonderful/ surprising!
It surprises me that ...
I’m pleased we were both amused at ...
I felt happy because ...
It’s amusing that ...
词 汇
1. 四会词汇
slide, skin, cruel, content, astonish, particular, entertain, failure, entertaining, throughout, homeless, worn-out, overcome, difficulty, boil, fortunate, snowstorm, bottom, chew, mouthful, direct, star, outstanding, Switzerland, fortune, swing, pancake, mountainous, whisper, vast, sense
2. 认知词汇
verbal, nonverbal, mime, farce, Charlie Chaplin, Edward Lear, bump, poverty, charming, tramp, lace, enjoyment, Oscar, costume, Sherlock Holmes
3. 词组
be content with, badly off, pick out, star in, knock into
语 法 构词法：名词与形容词之间的转化 动词的-ing形式作表语、定语和宾语补足语的用法（The -ing form as predicative, attribute and object complement）
重 点 句 子 Do you find it funny to see someone sliding on a banana skin, bumping into someone else round a corner, or falling down a hole in the road? P17
Perhaps it makes us feel more content with our life ... P17
He became famous for using a particular form of acting, including mime and farce. P17
But he was lived by all who watched the films for his determination in overcoming difficulties and being kind even when people were unkind to him.
P18
Imagine you are hungry and all there is to eat is a boiled shoe. P18
That was the problem facing Charlie Chaplin in one of his most famous films. P18
He solved it by using nonverbal humour. P18
Their job is “panning for gold”. P18
Finally he tries cutting and eating the bottom of the shoe. P18
Ⅲ. 教材分析与教材重组
1．教材分析
本单元的中心话题是“感受英语幽默”，其中涉及到了幽默的种类及其代表人物，并就中外幽默进行了粗略的比较，以此让学生感受英语幽默的内涵。
1.1 WARMING UP中提出了三个问题：How many kinds of humour do you know？Do you know these kinds of humour？ Do you have other kinds of humour in China？这三个问题直指本单元中心话题，为下一步的阅读理解作了准备。
1.2 PRE-READING在WARMING UP 的基础上提出了另外三个问题：What do you like to laugh at？ What does humour mean？ Is humour always kind？这三个问题进一步让学生了解幽默的含义，即把缺陷与完美、荒唐与合理、愚笨与机敏等两极对立的属性不动声色地结合起来，在对立统一中见其深刻的意义。
1.3 READING以美国著名喜剧大师Charlie Chaplin的表演为例，为学生展示了幽默的内涵。第一段以常见的踩香蕉皮滑倒为例，指出了幽默的内涵之一：“Perhaps it makes us feel more content with our life because we feel there is someone else worse off than ourselves”.从第二段开始介绍卓别林以其独特的表现方式成为著名的幽默大师，文中列举了两部他的喜剧片，一部是The Little Trump，另一部是The Gold Rush。前者以其穿着及行为而受到了人们的喜爱；后者通过吃皮鞋这一片段，让人领略了他的无与伦比的想象力与幽默感。卓别林将滑稽的相貌、夸张的穿戴和离奇的想象完美地结合起来，出于现实而又超脱现实。令人在捧腹大笑的同时，感到了他对待苦难的积极态度，和对下层小人物的同情。这篇文章揭示了幽默的内涵，给学生留下了思考的余地：Is humour always kind？
1.4 COMPREHENDING分为两部分。第一部分以填写表格的形式让学生练习写阅读笔记，同时提示他们人物传记的写法，让学生了解文章结构。第二部分练习课文中出现的生词。
1.5 LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE包括词汇和语法两部分。词汇部分强调用英语来解释词汇，并在实际情景中使用所学词汇。 语法部分主要通过大量的例句和习题来实现让学生自主学习的目的，总结-ing形式在句中作表语、宾语和宾语补足语的用法。
1.6 USING LANGUAGE部分, 从听、说、读、写四个方面来学习和巩固所学语言知识，全面体现语言运用能力。
2. 教材重组
2.1 将WARMING UP（P17）， READING（P22）与SPEAKING（P23）整合在一起上一堂口语课。
2.2 将PRE-READING，READING (P17), COMPREHENDING (P18)及LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE中的练习一和练习二整合在一起上一堂阅读课。从字、词、句、和篇章几个方面掌握目标语言。
2.3 将LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE (P20)中的剩余练习及USING LANGUAGE (P56)中的所有练习整合成语法课来练习ing形式在句中作表语、宾语和宾语补足语的用法。
2.4 将LISTENING(P23), LISTENING(P55) 和LISTENING TASK(P58)整合在一起上一堂听力课。
2.5 将WRITING（P23），TALKING（P55）和SPEAKING AND WRITING（P60）整合成一堂写作课。
2.6 将USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS（P56），READING TASK（P59），PROJECT（P61）和 SUMMING UP（P24）整合在一起上一堂复习课，总结这个单元所学全部内容。
3． 课时分配
1st period Speaking
2nd period Reading
3rd period Grammar
4th period Listening
5th period Writing
6th period Summary
Ⅳ. 分课时教案
The First Period Speaking
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target language 目标语言
a. 重点词汇
verbal, nonverbal, mime, farce, pancakes, mountainous, whisper
b. 重点句型
I think how short life is and how long the universe has lasted. P22
2. Ability goals 能力目标
Enable the students to talk about some types of English humour and Chinese humour.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
a. Help the students learn how to talk about some types of English and Chinese humour, and then find their differences.
b. Let the students listen, read, and then imitate the jokes, so that they can realize that humour is to let people to be optimistic about everything around.
Teaching important points 教学重点
Help the students learn how to understand and enjoy English humors.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
Help the students know the differences between English and Chinese in humours.
Teaching methods 教学方法
Using pictures, discussion, reading and imitation.
Teaching aids 教学准备
A recorder and a projector.
Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式
Step ⅠRevision
Have a dictation about the words and expressions that appeared in Unit 2.
Step Ⅱ Warming up
Start the new unit by showing the students a picture:
T: Look! What do you think of the picture?
Ss: It’s very funny! A wolf or a dog is jumping across the back of a sheep!
T: Yeah! It’s so funny that we cannot help laughing about their acting. It makes us feel nice. Today, we are going to learn something about humour. The title is A taste of English humour. Do you know something about English humour?
S1: I’m sorry.
S2: I know an English humour.
T: Really? Please read it to us.
S2: I’ll try. One day a patient went to see his doctor. He said to the doctor: “Doctor, I see double.” The doctor said: “Sit on the chair please.” And then the patient asked the doctor: “Which one?”
T: That’s really interesting! Thank you! In fact this is a kind of English humour, which we call verbal joke. Ok, here are some pictures. Look, who are they?
（1） （2） （3） （4）
S3: It’s Charlie Chaplin. And I know picture one is from a film called The Gold Rush.
T: Right. Who know the man in picture 3?
S4: I dare say that everyone know him. He’s Mr. Bean, one of the most famous and successful British actor.
T: You are right. He’s now recognized as the most popular British comedy expert. And how about the last one?
S5: It’s difficult to say. I guess he’s an American because the picture behind him looks like an American flag.
T: Right. He is Mark Twain, the famous American writer. Do you know something about him?
S6: He liked to make jokes with other people.
T: Have you once read some?
S6: Only a few.
T: Can you bring us some next time?
S6: Let me try.
T: OK, now, let’s look at the chart on Page 17. What does it tell us?
S7: From the table we can see that Charlie Chaplin is good at nonverbal humour; Mr. Bean is famous for his mime and farce; while Mark Twain was good at tell some funny stories. But I don’t know Edward Lear.
T: Right. Edward Lear is a famous British poet. His poems are funny. But they were all from daily life. Until now people also read them and enjoy them. Here is one of his short poems. Please look at the screen:
There was an old Man with a bread
There was an old man with a bread,
Who said, “It’s just as I feared!
Two owls and a hen,
Four larks and a wren,
Have all built their nests in my bread!”
T: In these two poems we can see that Edward Lear used a kind of magnification to make his poem funny. But because the sense of humour of English and Chinese is different, sometimes what they feel funny would not sound funny to us. But if you want to make fun of one of your friends, you can send them to him/her. They will be surprise to see these. Well, do you know these persons in the pictures? What are they good at? Nonverbal, mime and farce, funny stories or funny poems?
（1） （2） （3） （4）
S8: Picture 1 is Chen Peisi. I think he is famous for his mime and farce.
S9: Picture 2 is Zhao Benshan. He is famous for his Xiao pin. And he is also for his mime, I think.
S10: The two persons in picture 4 are Liu Quanhe and Liu Quanlin. They are good at Ya ju (哑剧).
T: Do you know the third person? No? He is the famous cross talk actor-Hou Baolin. When he was living, he was the most popular actor. Many of his works are the classic. OK, now can you finish the last column of the chart?
The Suggested answers:
English humour
Nonverbal
Mime and farce
Verbal jokes
Funny stories
Funny poems Chinese humour
Pantomime (哑剧) 刘全和、刘全林
Funny plays 陈佩斯、赵本山
Cross talk 侯宝林、马季
Jokes
Doggerel （打油诗）
Step Ⅲ Reading on P22
The purpose of this reading is to introduce the kind of humour we can laugh at -verbal jokes. They use a “play on words” to be funny. Let the students read the three jokes and then match the joke with the explanation.
T: Well, boys and girls, just now we learned something about English and Chinese jokes. Now let’s read some English jokes on Page 22. I’ll give three minutes for you to read them and then match the joke with the explanation. If you like, you may have a discussion. And then we’ll check the answer. OK, read them.
The students read and finish their task, and the teacher can show some other jokes on the screen. After they have finished the task, check the answer and ask them to enjoy the jokes on the screen.
T: Have you finished the reading? Are the jokes funny?
Ss: Yes, they are very funny. We’ve never found that English jokes so funny.
T: What’s the answer?
S11: The answer is 1 to B, 2 to C and 3 to A.
T: Good. Now, please look at the screen. Here are more jokes on it. Read them and enjoy them. If you have some troubles in understanding, discuss, or ask me.
Give the students some time to read the jokes.
Patient: Doctor, I’ve lost my memory.
Doctor: When did this happen?
Patient: When did what happen?
Anisha: Thank you doctor. My fever is gone.
Doctor: Don’t thank me. Thank god.
Anisha: Then I’ll pay the fees to god.
A man with two red ears went to see his doctor.
Doctor: What happened to your ears?
Man: I was ironing a shirt and the phone rang but instead of picking up the phone, I accidentally picked up the iron and stuck it to my ear.
Doctor: Oh Dear! But ... what happened to your other ear?
Man: The scoundrel (恶棍) called back!
T: Funny?
Ss: We’re laughing to death!
T: Don’t do that, another joke is waiting for you. Please read the neat joke on Page 22. And then finish the question followed.
Give the students three minutes to do it.
T: Now decide which of these two kinds of jokes you like better. Give your reason.
S12: I find the first kind jokes are easier to understand.
S13: Those jokes on the screen are the funnies ones, I think.
S14: We must understand the background of the funny story at first, and then we can know what a humor Sherlock Holmes was. I think to understand this kind of jokes needs wisdom to understand. We must know that he was a detective, so he was always thinking of the things such as stealing.
T: What you said is reasonable. Now let’s listen to the tape, pay attention to the intonation, and try to bring out the humorous meaning.
If time permits, the teacher can ask some students to act out the jokes.
Step IV Speaking
T: Now, we’ve learned some jokes and listened to some too. How about speaking out what you feel funny in class? I’ll give you five minutes to prepare this task, and then ask some of you to tell us your story. There are some steps for you to finish the task. If you think they are useful, follow them.
Five minutes later.
S15: My story is one day Lian Hong was standing by the window, talking with other students. Ren Xinglian came up. She wanted to make a joke with Lian and gave her a surprise. So she rushed towards Lian and kicked her at the same. But to all of us surprise, Ren slipped on the floor! Everybody laughed to bend their backs, me too.
T: Me too! OK, this class is full of joy. We know that in our life, there are full of happiness, sorrows, boredoms, and joys. When we meet with sorrows or boredoms, don’t forget to read these jokes. Maybe they can bring you sunshine. Am I right?
Ss: Yes. Thank you.
Step V Homework
T: Today’s homework is to preview the Reading material and finish the Comprehending ahead. And I have a wish that at the beginning of each class, one of our classmates can give us a joke, to bring smile into the classroom. Do you agree?
Ss: That’s a good idea.
T: Let’s begin from Group one. One of you will tell a joke to us at the beginning of next class. Don’t forget it. Ok, class is over. See you next time.
Ss: See you.
详细内容请订阅
《名师说课》
Unit 4 Body language
I．单元教学目标
技能目标 Skill Goals
Talk about body language: cultural differences and intercultural communication
Practise talking about prohibition & warning as well as obligation
Learn to use the -ing form as the Attribute && Adverbial
Learn to write a diary that showing the observation of how body language helps in communication
II． 目标语言
功
能
句
式 Talk about body language
What is the purpose of language?
What do you think “body language” means?
How can you tell if someone is sad or happy even if they do not speak?
How can you communicate a feeling to someone who does not speak your language?
Why do we need to study body language?
Talk about cultural differences && intercultural communication
What do British people often do when they meet strangers?
What do French people often do when they meet people they know?
Why should we be careful about our own body language?
Why is it important to watch others as well as listen to them?
词
汇 1． 四会词汇
major, local, represent, curious, Columbia, introduce, approach, touch, cheek, stranger, spoken, express, action, Jordan, nod, general, avoid, comedy, misunderstand, similar, facial, expression, agreement, yawn, chest, gesture, adult, punish
2． 认读词汇
Garcia, Julia, learned, unspoken, posture, Ahmed Aziz, Coulon, Muslim, frown, threaten
3． 词组
be likely to, at ease, an exciting experience for, not all ..., introduce oneself to sb
语
法 4． 重点词汇
represent, introduce, approach, touch, express, nod, avoid, misunderstand, punish, general, curious, similar, expression, agreement, gesture, action
The -ing form as the attribute && adverbial
Finding out in the reading text sentences with present participle(s) used as the attribute or adverbial.
1. The -ing form as the attribute
They are visitors coming from several other countries, ...
His nose touches Mr. Cook’s moving hand, ...
This is an exciting experience for you, ...
2. The -ing form as the adverbial
... so you stand watching and listening.
Four people enter looking around in a curious way.
You see her step back appearing surprised, and take a few steps away from Mr. Garcia.
The visitor from Japan comes in smiling at the same time as George Cook from Canada.
重 点 句 子 1. They will be meeting at a major hotel with local business people and people who represent the Chinese government. P25
2. The first person who arrives is Mr. Garcia from Columbia, closely followed by Julia Smith from Britain. P26
3. You think that there may have been a mistake. P26
4. Not all cultures greet each other the same way, nor are they comfortable touching strangers or being too close or too far away. P26
5. In the same way that people communicate with spoken language, they also express their feelings using unspoken “language” through keeping physical distance, actions or posture. P26
6. People from places like Spain, Italy or ... others closely and are more likely to touch them. P26
7. ... nodding the head shows agreement, while shaking
the head means that you do not agree, ... P30
Ⅲ． 教材分析和教材重组
1． 教材分析
本单元以Body Language--“体态语”为中心话题，具体涉及什么是“体态语”，如何理解“体态语”，以及“体态语”的跨文化性等。本单元的语言技能和语言知识也都是围绕“体态语”这一中心话题设计的，旨在通过单元教学，用听、说、读、写、做(表演)等多种形式，让学生正确认识和掌握“体态语”在交际中的作用和意义，使学生明确“体态语”在人类交际中的重要性，了解“体态语”在不同民族、不同文化交际中的多样性；使学生在今后的日常生活、学习、工作和交往中尽量减少或避免运用“体态语”时可能产生的误解，提高他们的“语言交际”能力和“非语言交际”能力。
1.1 WARMING UP 以列表对比（填充及增补）的形式，并通过WARMING UP的活动，让学生了解有声语言与“体态语”的对应关系，了解语言意义与行为意义（“体态语”）在交际中具有同等重要的作用。同时，学生在听、说、做（即表演“体态语”的动作）中能够增进对语言交际的感性认识，为他们在阅读过程中上升到对语言交际的理性认识打下基础。
1.2 PRE-READING 通过提供三个关于不同文化背景下“体态语”的问题，启发学生思考我们所学习的“语言”的目的、形式、功能。通过引导学生联系自己日常生活的实际，提高学生努力学习英语的积极性和自觉性；同时培养学生留心社会、关注生活的洞察力，为引导学生进一步“阅读”作好准备。
1.3 READING 是一篇介绍性（记叙文）体裁的文章，主要介绍了各种文化背景下的“体态语”的异同，为学生提供了来自不同国度、不同语言文化背景的“体态语”及其在交际中的异同和影响的具体例证。学生也可以结合自己在语言交际中所遇到的实际例子来进一步理解“交际，毫无问题可言吗？”这一主题。
1.4 COMPREHENDING 包括八个问题（前5个旨在检查学生对阅读材料细节的理解，6~7旨在引导学生对“体态语”的意义及文化差异的思考，第8个检查学生能否通过细节进行推理判断），通过对来自不同国度、不同语言文化背景的六个角色对待男女不同性别所使用的“体态语”异同的（学生在老师指导下的自我或小组讨论后的）归纳，进一步熟悉和掌握“体态语”在不同语言文化交际中的作用和意义。
1.5 LEARNING ABOUT LANGUAGE 分词汇和语法两部分。词汇部分由“本单元重点词汇英文释义”，“词语填空”和“词性变换”三项内容构成，语法部分由两大方面组成：一是让学生自己通过在课文中寻找相关语法的句子并按其语法功能分类，二是根据学生的认知规律安排该语法项目的练习让学生进行操练。整个项目通过三个练习和一个游戏，以及语法结构讲练，进一步巩固本单元所学词汇（尤其是课文中的黑体字），学习“现在分词”结构用作定语和状语，并通过操练，以收到“学以致用”、“熟练生巧”的效果。
1.6 USING LANGUAGE 通过增加阅读篇目“Showing Our Feelings”来拓展学生在“体态语”方面的知识视野，并通过“True” or “False”判断练习和问题讨论，使学生进一步明确“体态语”对人们在日常交际中了解对方情感、思想、态度等方面所起的作用。同时要让学生认真对待自己的“体态语”，并在日常交际中“听其言”（Listen to them）、“观其行”（Watch them）。此外，该部分还通过听、说、读、写四个方面来巩固本单元所学内容和语言交际项目。
1.7 SUMMING UP 师生从话题、词汇和结构三个方面来共同总结本单元所学的单词和短语，语言及语法项目，总结本单元所学的主要内容和收获。
1.8 LEARNING TIPS 建议学生关注实用交际技巧，学会“体态语”；建议学生在看英语电影时或与以英语为母语的人士交谈时，观察对方面部表情和体态姿势，观察对方的“言”、“行”，进而形成有效的口笔头语言及“体态语”的交际能力。
2. 教材重组
2.1 听力：Using language中的Listening, Workbook中的Listening和Listening Task这三部分的任务及话题较为接近，将这三个部分整合在一起上一堂听力课。
2.2 口语：Warming up, Using language中的Reading and Talking, Speaking和Workbook中的Talking，Speaking Task以及Learning about language中的Discovering useful words and expressions 4, “Play a game in group of four”均紧扣本单元话题，同时涉及到本单元的功能句，教师可指导学生通过“说”（用英语发出与“体态语”相关的指令）与“做”（用“体态语”表达指令）结合来进行口语训练，这将是一节生动有趣的口语课。
2.3 精读：把Pre-reading，Reading和Comprehending三部分整合为一节阅读课。
2.4 泛读：把Using Language中的Reading和Workbook中的Reading Task整合为一节拓展学生视野的泛读课。
2.5 语言学习：深入处理Learning about language中的Discovering useful words and expressions, Discovering useful structures; Workbook中的Using Words and Expressions和Using Structures。重点学习Discovering useful structures中“-ing (现在分词)”在句中做定语和状语的用法。
2.6 语言运用：处理Using Language中的Reading and Writing和Workbook中的Writing Task。指导学生写一篇有关“The Body Language I Know”短文，反映其在不同文化背景、不同语言环境中的运用情况，及所造成的理解上的困难、障碍甚至误解等。
3． 课型设计与课时分配
1st period Speaking
2nd period Reading (I)
3rd period Reading（II）
4th period Language Study
5th period Listening
6th period Writing
Ⅳ． 分课时教案
The First Period Speaking
Teaching goals 教学目标
1. Target Language目标语言
a. 重点词汇和短语
misunderstand, similar, facial, expression, agreement, yawn, chest, gesture, adult, punish
b. 重点句型或交际用语
Act out the following meanings, please.
Please guess what I mean.
Please show the actions, using body language.
Now it is your turn to show the action / gesture.
Please use either spoken words or body language to express your ideas.
Please use both spoken words and body language to express your ideas.
2. Ability goals能力目标
a. Enable the students to understand what a certain gesture of the body language means in a given situation.
b. Enable the students to act out some meanings, requirements, requests or situations given in the target language.
c. Enable the students to express with the target language the meanings given in body language.
3. Learning ability goals 学能目标
a. Help the students learn how to express themselves in body language when needed.
b. Help the students understand others when body language is being used.
Teaching important points教学重点
a. Teach the students how to understand body language used in different countries or cultures as well as in different occasions.
b. Teach the students how to use body language in the most appropriate occasions.
Teaching difficult points 教学难点
a. Enable the students to realize the importance of body language in communication so that little or no misunderstanding may occur.
b. Let the students know that there is both positive body language and negative body language.
Teaching methods教学方法
a. Individual work, pair work and group work.
b. Acting out by imitation, mime or with gestures and body movement.
Teaching aids教具准备
A computer, a projector and some pictures.
Teaching procedures & ways教学过程与方式
Step I Lead-in
The teacher shows some pictures on screen. These pictures are from the Evening Party Celebrating the coming Lunar New Year of the Rooster of 2005.
Ss: Yes, Thousands of Hands Kwan-yin.
T: But do you know who she is? Yes, she was the leading dancer of the program. Her name is Tai Lihua（邰丽华）. She is called a Fairy of Peach blossom(桃花仙子) by people. You know she is a deaf girl, but she is a wise, diligent, charming and energetic girl. She studied very hard and got two degrees of bachelors in university. She was famous as an artist for her wonderful performance. She is deaf and dumb. But how did she get that great achievement and became a successful person? She loves life very much. We should learn from her spirit. Besides her hard working, body language plays a very important part in her life. We are all healthy people, sometimes we can use body language to express ourselves. So we should pay more attention to learning body languages.
Step II Introduction
T: Now let’s do some TPR (Total Physical Response) activities together, I hope you will enjoy them and have fun as well.
Touch your head / face / eyes / nose / mouth / ears / cheeks / forehead / shoulders / stomach / legs / feet / toes ...
Shake your head / arm / hand ...
Wave your arm / hand ...
Open your eyes / arms /mouth ...
Close your eyes / mouth ...
Twist your wrist / waist.
Cross your arms / fingers.
Nod your head. Bow your head.
Make a face to each other.
Bend / cry / shout / scream / smile / laugh ...
T: All right. Now let’s do them a little bit difficult. Let’s play a game together. Those who fail to follow the rule of the game will be dropped out. The game is: “Simon says”. For example, if I say “Simon says, touch your head”, then you touch your head. If not, you shouldn’t touch your head but remain still. Clear? Ready? Now let’s start.
3 or 5 minutes for the game.
T: Ok. It’s time to take up the lesson. Please look at the screen. Let’s take a look at the following gestures:
Gesture Action Meaning
A handshake You are welcome.
A clap of hand Come on; be cheerful.
A V-shape of the fore-finger and middle finger May you succeed!
Or congratulations on your success!
A half-closed hand with thumb down I am not in favor of your idea or I’ll have to refuse you.
A wrinkling of the brow in thought or displeasure or a scowl She is worried.
Tears coming out of his eyes. He is very sad.
All smiles on her face She is very happy.
Waving their hands They are waving goodbye to people around.
A hand stretched out forward with strength He is stopping a tank.
People jump with their both hands stretched open in the air. They are cheering for the victory.
T: What are the actions of the above gestures? What do they mean?
S4: The first gesture is a handshake, which means “You’re welcome”.
S5: The second is a handclap, which means “Come on” or “Be cheerful” or something like that.
S6: The third one is a V-shaped posture of the first finger and the middle finger, which suggests a wish for the other or others to succeed.
S7: The fourth is a half-closed hand with the thumb down. It means the one who gives this gesture is against the other’s idea or simply refuses the request.
S8: The fifth is a worried look of a woman. She wrinkles her brows or frowns. It also seems that she scowls. It shows that she is worried or sad. In other words, she is unhappy.
S9: The sixth is a man shedding tears. Tears were running down his cheeks. He is very sad for losing his relatives or sad for his failure.
S10: The seventh is a smiling face. It is easy to see that she is very happy.
S11: The eighth is a gesture of waving hands. They are waving goodbye to people who are around to see them off.
S12: The ninth is a hand stretched out forward with great strength. The boy is trying to stop a tank from entering into his homeland.
S13: The tenth is hands stretched out upward. They are all very cheerful. They are wild with joy; maybe they have just won a game. So we can see that they are cheering for their victory.
T: You have all done a good job. So you see that there are many cases or situations in which body language can convey meanings as well as spoken or written languages. If you want to know more about it, let’s come to Unit 4 Body Language.
Step Ⅲ Practice
T: Look at the chart on Page 25. Here is a list. On the left side are feelings or ideas. You are asked to add three of your own. Make notes on the right side of the chart and then act them out to see how you would make someone understand these feelings and ideas without speaking. Do it with your partner first. And then some of you will be asked to the front of the classroom to act them out.
Meaning Action
1. You are welcome. A smile and a handshake.
2. I am worried. A frowned or upset look.
3. I ate too much Putting a hand on the stomach, patting or rubbing.
4. I am sorry that I did something wrong. Drooping or hanging the head.
5. I’m so happy. A loud laughter with a shining face or smiling with arms open and head back.
6. You did a good job. A thumb up.
7. You are angry. Turning your back to someone on purpose.
8. Stop here. Putting the left palm on the forefinger of the right hand.
Demonstration:
The students can be allowed to act out the feelings or ideas without following the order in the chart so that it may be more challenging as well as more interesting.
Step Ⅳ Time for Fun
T: Now let’s play a game in groups of four. One thinks of a situation and asks the others to show some actions using body language. When the one chooses the action that is most likely, it is his or her turn to think of some other situation for the others to show the actions so that the game may go on for a few rounds. Clear?
Ss: Yes. That’s funny!
T: Try to make the situations as interesting and enjoyable as you can. And show the situation as lively as possible. Besides, make sure that everyone has a turn.
Ss: All right.
S1: What are you likely to do if it rains?
(Actions) S2: reads a book;
S3: puts on a raincoat;
S4: cleans the house.
S1: Ok. I think S3 seems the most likely, so it is his turn.
S3: What are you likely to do if the river floods?
(Actions) S1: runs away as fast as he can;
S2: helps the younger or elder to escape as soon as possible;
S4: climbs on to a tree.
S3: Ok. I think S2 seems the most likely, so it is her turn.
S2: What are you likely to do if the house catches fire?
(Actions) S1: fetches some water;
S3: tries to put it out with blooms;
S4: runs away as quickly as he can.
S2: Ok. I think S4 seems the most likely, so it is his turn.
S4: What are you likely to do if you meet with a fierce dog?
(Actions) S1: remains where he is and bends down, looking at the dog;
S3: tries to scare it away with small stones;
S4: runs away as quickly as possible.
S2: Ok. I think S1 seems the most likely, so we all have done a good job.
T: Yes. I couldn’t agree with you. Now, one more group.
Step V Talking
Get the students to work in pairs. The situation is that you are worried about Lin Pei, who is not friendly any more, and does not want to talk to you or her other friends. She seems to be sad. She stays alone. She is not doing her homework and the teacher is not pleased with her. She doesn’t seem to care about how she looks and behaves.
T: Now class, work in pair. Discuss Lin Pei’s behavior. Think about the problems she might have. Describe her “body language” or the behavior that shows how she feels. Three minutes for you.
T: All right, who’d like to describe or act out Lin Pei’s behavior?
S1: I think there is something wrong with her. When I saw her recently, she would turn away from me and would not speak to me. (Miming the action)
S2: Yes, when I saw her in class, she looked as if she had been crying. And she would not even look at me. She just looked straight out of the window. She seemed as if she could see nobody in her eyes. (Miming the action)
S3: I quite agree. When I met her at the school gate and tried to have a word with her, she just bent down her head and passed me as if she hadn’t noticed me. (Miming the action)
S4: I couldn’t agree with you more! This morning, when I went close to her, trying to start a conversation between us, she crossed her arms in front of her and didn’t look at me. And then she turned away immediately. (Miming the action)
T: Good job. Now class, let’s try to think of a way to help her out, OK?
Ss: Yes, Sir.
Step Ⅵ Role Play (Speaking task on P67)
T: Now, there’s still a little time left. Let’s come to Speaking Task on Page 67. We’re given two situations. For each situation, prepare a role-play with your partner. Use both spoken words and body language to express your ideas. Then explain to the class what the differences are in Western and Chinese languages, and what they mean. The first two sentences have been given in the text.
Work in pairs
1. You fall and hurt your foot while you are hiking on a
lonely path. You need help, and see someone in the distance.
S1-You, S2-Passer-by
S1: Help! Help! Please come over here! (waving and crooking your hand toward the place where you are lying)
S2: What do you want? I can’t hear you! (hand behind your ear)
S1: Can you see me? Please come here! (waving and crooking your hand again toward the place where you are lying)
S2: Why? I can’t understand you. (with a forefinger on the right side of the head)
S1: I hurt my foot when I fell. (pointing to your injured foot)
S2: All right. I am coming! (running)
Work in group of three
2. You are visiting a strange city and need to buy some tea and oranges. You only know a little English and want to know where you can get them and how much they cost.
S1-You, S2-Passer-by, S3-Shopkeeper
S1: Can you help me please? I need some tea and some oranges. (smiling and leaning forward)
S2: Pardon? What do you need?
S1: Tea (taking out the little sample) and oranges (using thumb and the forefinger to form a round shape). Where can I get some? (miming the question)
S2: Oh, this is tea. And some oranges, right?
S1: (Nodding your head) Yes. Where can I buy some? (repeating the mime)
S2: (Showing the way) This way, please.
S1: Thanks. (acting out the Chinese way to show thanks)
S2: Here you are.
(They are entering the grocery store.)
S3: Can I help you?
S2: He wants to buy some tea and oranges.
S3: No problem. (To S1) How much tea do you need? And how many oranges?
S1: (Sticking out five fingers to show half kilo of tea, and two hands to show ten oranges)
S3: Here you are.
S1: How much are they? ( drawing the sign of the US dollar-$)
S3: (Working on the calculator) $9 in all including taxes.
S1: Here is ten dollars. (handing the ten-dollar note)
S3: Here is the change.
S1: Thanks. (nodding your thanks) Bye!
Step Ⅶ Homework
1. Team work: Discuss the importance of body language.
2. Go over the Reading:
1) Communication: No Problem?
2) Showing our feeling.
T: I think you must have known something about these pictures. Yes, they are from a program of CCTV, the Evening Party Celebrating the Spring Festival of 2005, the coming Lunar New Year of the Rooster. I think that was the best program. Do you remember the name of this program?
详细内容请订阅
《名师说课》
教学过程： 1、组织教学（导言）
I.Language is learned in context. So let’s first review the text learned yesterday by reading it aloud. Try to force out your English slowly and clearly
II. Discovering useful words and expressions
In pairs do the exercises 1, 2 and 3 on pages 11 and 12. You must finish them in 5 minutes.
2.复习提问：
3、讲授新课：
III. Learning about grammar
1. Read and identify
Read the text about Yuan Longping again, paying attention to the sentences which use the –ing form as the subject and object.
In the sentence “Wishing for things, however, cost nothing. “the –ing is used as subject.
It can be also used as object of the sentence. For example: Yuan Longping likes playing his violin.
2. Consolidating by do exercises
To consolidate your understanding you will be given 10 minutes to go over exercises 1,2,3,4 and 5 on pages 12 and 13. You may just write on your text book. I mean the student’s book you are working by.
III. Ready used materials for The –ing form as the Subject & Object)
语法学习--动名词
1. 动名词作主语
1） 名词直接放在句首作主语。例如：
Using the right hand to shake hands is a convention in many countries.
用右手握手是许多国家的一种习俗。
2） 动名词在“It is no use/ no good/ fun / a waste of time/ a good pleasure 等名词 + doing”结构中作主语，it为形式主语。例如：
It is no good writing to him; he never answers letters.
写信给他不妥，他从来不回信。
It is no use your complaining; the company won’t do anything about it.
抱怨是没有用的，公司是不会管的。
3） 动名词在“It is useless/ nice/ good/ interesting/ worthwhile 等形容词 + doing”结构中作主语。例如：
It is good playing chess after supper.
晚饭后弈棋挺好。
It is useless speaking.
光说是没有用的。
4） 动名词在“There is(was) no + doing”结构中作主语。例如：
There is no denying that she is very efficient.
她效率高是不容否认的。
There is no telling what he is going to do.
他要做什么一点消息都没有。
2. 动名词作宾语
1） 有些动词后面要求跟动名词作宾语。常这样用的动词有：
admit 承认 ； excuse 原谅 ； postpone 拖延 ；anticipate 期望； fancy 想象
practise 练习； appreciate 欣赏； finish 完成； prevent 防止； avoid 避免；
forbid 禁止； propose 建议； consider 考虑； forgive 宽恕； recollect 回忆；
delay 耽搁； imagine 想象； resent 厌恶； deny 否认； involve 涉及；
resist 抵制； detest 厌恶； keep 保留； risk 冒险； dislike 讨厌； mind 在意； save 挽救； dread 害怕； miss 错过； suggest 建议； enjoy 喜欢； pardon 原谅；
understand 理解； escape 逃避；permit 允许
例如：
I recommend buying the dictionary.
我建议买这本词典。
I don’t anticipate meeting any opposition.
我估计不会遇到任何反对意见。
Will you admit having broken the window?
你承认不承认打破了窗户？
2） 有些动词短语后也要求跟动名词作宾语。常这样用的动词短语有：
can’t stand 忍不住； can’t help 忍不住； feel like 想，欲；
give up 放弃； put off 推迟
例如：
He put off making a decision till he had more information.
在获得详情之前，他没有急于作出决定。
Do you feel like taking a walk?
你要不要去散步？
3） 动名词常跟在介词或介词短语后做宾语。常这样用的介词短语有：instead of, look forward to, object to, keep on, see about, take to 等。
例如：
We are looking forward to coming to China.
我们期待着来中国。
We succeeded in getting over all the difficulties.
我们终于克服了所有的困难。
4） 在“have difficulty (trouble, problem, a hard time, fun, a good time) (+in) + 动名词； be busy (in) + 动名词；waste time (in) + 动名词；lost time (in) + 动名词；There is no point (in) + 动名词”等结构中，动名词做介词宾语，in常要省去。例如：
The children are busy doing their homework.
孩子们忙于做作业。
There is no point (in) making the simple experiments once again.
再做一次这种简单的实验是毫无意义的。
5） 在复合宾语中，用it作形式宾语，将动名词短语放在后面。例如：
I consider it a waste of time arguing about it.
我认为辩论这事是很浪费时间的。
6） 在“there be”结构当中，be为动名词时，该结构也是一种带逻辑主语的动名词形式。例如：
We can imagine there being a lot of fuss about it.
我们可以想象到人们对此大惊小怪。
Were you disappointed at there not having been more gifts?
你对没有更多的礼物感到失望吗？
3. 动名词的被动式
1） 动词need, require, want, deserve后，用动名词的主动形式表示被动意义。其用法相当于不定式的被动结构。例如：
The watch needs repairing. (=The watch needs to be repaired.)
这块表需要修理。
The problem deserves thinking about. (=The problem deservers to be thought about.)
这个问题值得考虑。
2） 在（be）worth后面只能用动名词的主动态来表示被动意义。例如：
His suggestion is worth considering.
他的提议值得考虑。
IV. Closing down by doing a quiz
4. 课堂练习
巩固练习: 动名词要点单项选择测验
1. While shopping, people sometimes can't help ________ into buying something they don't really need.
A. to persuade B. persuading C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
2. -How do you deal with the disagreement between the company and the customers?
-The key ________ the problem is to meet the demand ________ by the customers.
A. to solving; making
B. to solving; made
C. to solve; making
D. to solve; made
3. How about the two of us ________ a walk down the garden?
A. to take B. take C. taking D. to be taking
4. -What do you think made Mary so upset?
- ________ her new bicycle.
A. As she lost B. Lost C. Losing D. Because of losing
5. -We don't allow anyone ________ here.
-Well, I hate to say it again. We don't allow ________ here.
A. to smoke; smoking
B. smoking; to smoke
C. to smoke; to smoke
D. smoking; smoking
6. They thought there is no trouble ________ their favorite brand from other brands.
A. to tell B. telling
C. tell D. told
7. Some birds finally reach home by accidentally ________ landmarks which they recognize.
A. to come across B. coming around C. coming across D. to come around
8. Millions of pounds have been spent ________ the free state education system in Britain.
A. to improving B. in improving C. to improve D. to have improved
9. A large glass of water before you eat may help ________ too excited before delicious foods.
A. to keep you from getting
B. to carry you from getting
C. to prevent you to get
D. to stop you to get
10. ________ for school once in a while often makes Mr. Smith angry.
A. Tom being late B. Tom to be late C. For Tom being late D. Tom's being late
Key: 1-5 CBCCA 6-10 BCBAD
5、布置作业：
Finish Ex1,2,3 on P13
6、课堂总结：
Some verbs that can follow –ing form as object should be learnt by your heart.
板书设计： admit 承认 ； excuse 原谅 ； postpone 拖延 ；anticipate 期望； fancy 想象
practise 练习； appreciate 欣赏； finish 完成； prevent 防止； avoid 避免；
forbid 禁止； propose 建议； consider 考虑； forgive 宽恕； recollect 回忆；
delay 耽搁； imagine 想象； resent 厌恶； deny 否认； involve 涉及；
resist 抵制； detest 厌恶； keep 保留； risk 冒险； dislike 讨厌； mind 在意； save 挽救； dread 害怕； miss 错过； suggest 建议； enjoy 喜欢； pardon 原谅；
understand 理解； escape 逃避；permit 允许
教学反思：
Unit 3 A Taste of English Humor
Period 1 warming up
1 Collect Chinese humor from students and share in the class.
Examples given to choose from:
(1)一人上班老是放响屁,同事忍不住说:你能不能不出声?然后便见他坐在那里抖个不停,问他干什么? 答: 我现在已经调成振动啦…
(2)有一个学生放学不走校门,他爬墙.被校长抓住,问他:有校门为什么要翻墙?
学生指了指身上的衣服说:邦威---不走寻常路.
校长说:墙那么高,你是怎么翻过去的?
学生指了指身上的裤子说:李宁----一切皆有可能
校长问:翻墙有什么感觉?
学生指了指脚上的鞋说: 特步----飞一般的感觉
校长说那我要记你大过,学生问:为什么?
校长说:动感地带---我的地盘听我的
2 Why do you laugh? It is quite humorous,funny,entertaining
3 After listening to the stories, how do you feel now? what can humor bring us?
It can bring us a lot of good: laughter, happiness, joy,relaxation,entertainment,amusement,pleasure,appreciation,comfort,good mood, at least forget problems for a while.
4 Besides funny stories, what others can make us laugh?
body language, make faces, make fun of others, play tricks on others,
stereotypes of different nationalities, foreigners speak with an accent,word play,
laughing matter: tongue twister, comedy, Nonverbal mime and farce, Verbal jokes, funny stories, funny poems, pantomime(哑剧),funny plays, cross talk. Sketch,limerick and so on
5 Their characteristics and famous humorists (Chinese and foreign)
Nonverbal Mime and farce:use body language to make people fun, Charlie chaplin
Verbal jokes:
Funny stories: Mark twain
Funny poems: Edward lear
Pantomime:刘全和，刘全利
Funny plays:陈佩斯
Cross talk: two speakers make many jokes and funny conversations姜昆
Mark Twain: a popular and humorous American author, He was the most famous humorous novelist in America. (funny stories)
Edward Lear (1812-1888):an artist. “A book of nonsense”
Mr. Bean: he is funny because he makes funny faces, acts silly, seems to be quite stupid, and the things he does are strange.
(1)A funny story
Little Johnny feels sorry for teacher
A new teacher was trying to make use of her psychology(哲学) courses. She started up her class by saying “Everyone who thinks you're stupid, stand up!”
After a few seconds, Little Johnny stood up.
The teacher said, “Do you think you're stupid, Little Johnny?”
\"No, ma'am, but I hate to see you standing there all by yourself!!
(2)An English limerick(打油诗)(P60)
A clumsy（笨重的） young fellow named Tim,
Was never taught how to swim.
He fell off a dock,
And sunk like a rock,
And that was the end of him.
(3) clowns
make people laugh without talking. I’m dressed in a funny way, always wearing bright and big clothing, a special hat and shoes. We usually wear make-up and most have a red nose, walking in a funny way and doing something silly. I love my job because we make people laugh and forget their problems.
(4)tongue twister:
1 Betty bought some butter, but the butter was bitter, so she bought some better butter to make the bitter butter better.
2 I wish to wish the wish you wish to wish, but if you wish the wish the witch wishes, I won’t wish the wish you wish to wish.
3 If white chalk chalks white on a black blackboard, will black chalk chalk black on a whiteboard then?
6 When do we use humor?
Break the silence, lessen the stress, cheer sb up, catch other’s eye, join in and share with others, happy occasions…
7 Are you humorous/ a humorist? Do you want to make friends with those with a sense of humor? Why?
Optimistic, easy to get along with, easygoing, life is full of laughter…
Life is challenging, meet it.
Life is various, make it.
Life is beautiful, discover it.
Life is humorous, enjoy it.
Laughing is better than medicine.
Laughter is the best medicine in the world.
8 Is humor always kind?
Mean ill on purpose, make fun of sb, play tricks on others, embarrass someone, laugh at someone, look down upon…
9 Share varieties of humor in our textbook(p22+p60)